User Guide
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480
www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480 User
Guide
SUMMARY
This guide provides conguration, use, warranty, safety and environmental information.
Legal information
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2021 HP Development Company,
L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed
as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 2, 2/2021
Trademark Credits
Adobe
®
, Adobe Photoshop
®
, Acrobat
®
, and
PostScript
®
are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
macOS is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Google™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows Server®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX
®
is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
Table of contents
1 Printer overview..........................................................................................................................................................................................1
Warning icons..........................................................................................................................................................................................1
Potential shock hazard..........................................................................................................................................................................2
Printer views ...........................................................................................................................................................................................3
Printer front view...........................................................................................................................................................................3
Printer back view ...........................................................................................................................................................................3
Control-panel view........................................................................................................................................................................4
Printer specications .............................................................................................................................................................................7
Technical specications................................................................................................................................................................7
Supported operating systems.....................................................................................................................................................8
Mobile printing solutions........................................................................................................................................................... 10
Printer dimensions..................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Power consumption................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Electrical specications ............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Acoustic emissions..................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Operating-environment range................................................................................................................................................. 13
Printer hardware setup and software installation......................................................................................................................... 13
2 Paper trays................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) ....................................................................................................................................... 15
Load Paper Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)................................................................................................................................... 15
Tray 1 paper orientation ........................................................................................................................................................... 17
Load paper to Tray 2........................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Load paper Tray 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Tray 2 paper orientation ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
Use alternative letterhead mode............................................................................................................................................. 22
Load paper to Tray 3 (optional accessory)...................................................................................................................................... 22
Load paper Tray 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Tray 3 paper orientation ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
Use alternative letterhead mode............................................................................................................................................. 26
Load and print envelopes................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Print envelopes........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Envelope orientation.................................................................................................................................................................. 27
Load and print labels .......................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Manually feed labels .................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Label orientation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 28
3 Supplies, accessories, and parts............................................................................................................................................................ 31
Order supplies, accessories, and parts ............................................................................................................................................ 31
Ordering....................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Supplies and accessories .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
iii
Customer self-repair parts........................................................................................................................................................ 33
Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings ..................................................................................................... 34
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature ...................................................................................................................... 34
Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature .............................................................................................................. 36
Replace the toner cartridges............................................................................................................................................................. 38
Toner cartridge information...................................................................................................................................................... 38
Remove and replace the toner cartridges.............................................................................................................................. 41
4 Print............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Print tasks (Windows)......................................................................................................................................................................... 45
How to print (Windows)............................................................................................................................................................. 45
Automatically print on both sides (Windows) ........................................................................................................................ 46
Manually print on both sides (Windows) ................................................................................................................................ 46
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows) ............................................................................................................................. 47
Select the paper type (Windows)............................................................................................................................................. 47
Additional print tasks................................................................................................................................................................. 48
Print tasks (macOS)............................................................................................................................................................................. 48
How to print (macOS)................................................................................................................................................................. 48
Automatically print on both sides (macOS)............................................................................................................................ 49
Manually print on both sides (macOS) .................................................................................................................................... 49
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)................................................................................................................................. 50
Select the paper type (macOS)................................................................................................................................................. 50
Additional print tasks................................................................................................................................................................. 50
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately ..................................................................................................... 51
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Create a stored job (Windows) ................................................................................................................................................. 51
Create a stored job (macOS) ..................................................................................................................................................... 52
Print a stored job ........................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Delete a stored job..................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes.................................................................................................... 54
Mobile printing..................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 54
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing ..................................................................................................................... 54
HP ePrint via email..................................................................................................................................................................... 55
AirPrint ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
Android embedded printing...................................................................................................................................................... 56
Print from a USB ash drive .............................................................................................................................................................. 56
Enable the USB port for printing.............................................................................................................................................. 57
Print USB documents................................................................................................................................................................. 57
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired) .................................................................................................................................. 58
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus ............................................ 58
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected
printers only)............................................................................................................................................................................... 58
5 Copy ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Make a copy.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
iv
Copy on both sides (duplex) .............................................................................................................................................................. 63
Additional copy tasks.......................................................................................................................................................................... 64
6 Scan............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
Set up Scan to Email........................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 67
Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 67
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)....................................................................................................... 68
Step two: Congure the Network Identication settings..................................................................................................... 68
Step three: Congure the Send to Email feature................................................................................................................... 69
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)....................................................................................................................... 78
Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use Oice 365 Outlook (optional)................................................................................ 78
Set up Scan to Network Folder ......................................................................................................................................................... 81
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 81
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)....................................................................................................... 81
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder............................................................................................................................... 82
Set up Scan to SharePoint ................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Before you begin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 91
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)....................................................................................................... 91
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set........................................................... 92
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site................................................................................................................................... 93
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint .............................................................................................. 95
Set up Scan to USB Drive ................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................. 96
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)....................................................................................................... 96
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive........................................................................................................................................ 97
Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)..................................................................................................................... 97
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup............................................................................................................... 98
Default le settings for Save to USB setup ............................................................................................................................ 99
Scan to email......................................................................................................................................................................................100
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................100
Scan to email.............................................................................................................................................................................100
Scan to job storage ...........................................................................................................................................................................102
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................102
Scan to job storage on the printer.........................................................................................................................................102
Print from job storage on the printer....................................................................................................................................104
Scan to network folder.....................................................................................................................................................................104
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................105
Scan to network folder ............................................................................................................................................................105
Scan to SharePoint............................................................................................................................................................................107
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................107
Scan to SharePoint...................................................................................................................................................................107
Scan to USB drive ..............................................................................................................................................................................109
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................109
v
Scan to USB drive .....................................................................................................................................................................109
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions .....................................................................................................................................111
Additional scan tasks........................................................................................................................................................................111
7 Fax............................................................................................................................................................................................................113
Set up fax............................................................................................................................................................................................113
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................113
Set up fax by using the printer control panel.......................................................................................................................113
Change fax congurations...............................................................................................................................................................114
Fax dialing settings ..................................................................................................................................................................114
General fax send settings .......................................................................................................................................................115
Fax receive settings..................................................................................................................................................................116
Send a fax...........................................................................................................................................................................................117
Create a fax printing schedule.........................................................................................................................................................119
Block incoming faxes........................................................................................................................................................................119
Create a list of blocked fax numbers.....................................................................................................................................119
Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers ......................................................................................................120
Additional fax tasks...........................................................................................................................................................................120
8 Manage the printer ................................................................................................................................................................................121
Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).........................................................................................121
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................121
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).........................................................................................................122
HP Embedded Web Server features......................................................................................................................................122
Congure IP network settings.........................................................................................................................................................131
Printer sharing disclaimer.......................................................................................................................................................131
View or change network settings ..........................................................................................................................................131
Rename the printer on a network .........................................................................................................................................131
Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel...............................................................................132
Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel...............................................................................132
Link speed and duplex settings .............................................................................................................................................133
Printer security features ..................................................................................................................................................................134
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................134
Security statements.................................................................................................................................................................134
Assign an administrator password........................................................................................................................................134
IP Security..................................................................................................................................................................................135
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks.........................................................................................135
Lock the formatter ...................................................................................................................................................................135
Energy-conservation settings.........................................................................................................................................................135
Set the sleep timer and congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power................................................................135
Set the sleep schedule ............................................................................................................................................................136
Set the idle settings .................................................................................................................................................................136
HP Web Jetadmin ..............................................................................................................................................................................137
Software and rmware updates .....................................................................................................................................................137
9 Solve problems.......................................................................................................................................................................................139
vi
Control panel help system...............................................................................................................................................................139
Reset factory settings ......................................................................................................................................................................139
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................140
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel ................................................................................140
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers only)........140
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel or EWS ..............................140
Change the “Very Low” settings.............................................................................................................................................141
Order supplies...........................................................................................................................................................................142
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds..................................................................................................................................142
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................142
The printer does not pick up paper .......................................................................................................................................142
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper.....................................................................................................................145
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper......................................................................148
Clear paper jams................................................................................................................................................................................149
Paper jam locations .................................................................................................................................................................149
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams..............................................................................................................................150
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?.................................................................................................................150
31.13 jam error in the document feeder..............................................................................................................................150
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1...................................................................................................................................................154
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2...................................................................................................................................................156
13.A3 jam error in tray 3 .........................................................................................................................................................159
13.B2 jam error in rear door...................................................................................................................................................162
13.B4, 13.B5 jam error in fuser input ...................................................................................................................................165
13.B9 jam error in fuser output .............................................................................................................................................167
13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer................................................................................................................................169
13.E1 jam error in the output bin ..........................................................................................................................................171
Resolving color print quality problems..........................................................................................................................................171
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................171
Troubleshoot print quality ......................................................................................................................................................172
Improve copy image quality ............................................................................................................................................................184
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges ...................................................................................................................184
Calibrate the scanner...............................................................................................................................................................186
Check the paper settings ........................................................................................................................................................186
Check the image-adjustment settings .................................................................................................................................186
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures ............................................................................................................................187
Edge-to-edge copying.............................................................................................................................................................187
Improve scan image quality.............................................................................................................................................................188
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges ...................................................................................................................188
Check the resolution settings.................................................................................................................................................189
Check the color settings..........................................................................................................................................................190
Check the image-adjustment settings .................................................................................................................................190
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures ............................................................................................................................191
Check the output-quality settings.........................................................................................................................................191
Improve fax image quality ...............................................................................................................................................................192
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges ...................................................................................................................192
Check the send-fax resolution settings................................................................................................................................194
vii
Check the image-adjustment settings .................................................................................................................................194
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures...............................................................................................................................194
Check the error-correction setting ........................................................................................................................................195
Check the t-to-page setting .................................................................................................................................................195
Send to a dierent fax machine.............................................................................................................................................195
Check the sender's fax machine ............................................................................................................................................196
Solve wired network problems .......................................................................................................................................................196
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................196
Poor physical connection........................................................................................................................................................196
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer ................................................................................................196
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network..........................................................................197
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems................................................................................197
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly................................................................................................197
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect ......................................................................................197
Solve wireless network problems...................................................................................................................................................197
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................197
Wireless connectivity checklist...............................................................................................................................................197
The printer does not print after the wireless conguration completes...........................................................................198
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed ........................................................199
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer ...................................................199
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer ..................................................................................................199
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN............................................................................199
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list .............................................................................................199
The wireless network is not functioning...............................................................................................................................200
Reduce interference on a wireless network.........................................................................................................................200
Solve fax problems ...........................................................................................................................................................................200
Checklist for solving fax problems.........................................................................................................................................200
General fax problems ..............................................................................................................................................................202
Appendix A Service and support.............................................................................................................................................................205
HP limited warranty statement.......................................................................................................................................................205
UK, Ireland, and Malta..............................................................................................................................................................206
Austria, Belgium, Germany, and Luxemburg .......................................................................................................................206
Belgium, France, and Luxemburg ..........................................................................................................................................207
Italy.............................................................................................................................................................................................208
Spain...........................................................................................................................................................................................208
Denmark ....................................................................................................................................................................................209
Norway.......................................................................................................................................................................................209
Sweden ......................................................................................................................................................................................209
Portugal .....................................................................................................................................................................................210
Greece and Cyprus ...................................................................................................................................................................210
Hungary .....................................................................................................................................................................................210
Czech Republic..........................................................................................................................................................................211
Slovakia......................................................................................................................................................................................211
Poland ........................................................................................................................................................................................211
Bulgaria......................................................................................................................................................................................212
Romania.....................................................................................................................................................................................212
Belgium and the Netherlands ................................................................................................................................................212
viii
Finland........................................................................................................................................................................................213
Slovenia......................................................................................................................................................................................213
Croatia ........................................................................................................................................................................................213
Latvia..........................................................................................................................................................................................213
Lithuania ....................................................................................................................................................................................214
Estonia .......................................................................................................................................................................................214
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement.................................................214
Long life consumable and maintenance kit limited warranty statement ................................................................................215
HP policy on non-HP supplies.........................................................................................................................................................215
HP anticounterfeit Web site.............................................................................................................................................................215
Data stored on the toner cartridge.................................................................................................................................................216
End User License Agreement ..........................................................................................................................................................216
Customer self-repair warranty service ..........................................................................................................................................220
Customer support .............................................................................................................................................................................220
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................................................221
Protecting the environment ............................................................................................................................................................221
Ozone production..............................................................................................................................................................................221
Power consumption..........................................................................................................................................................................221
Toner consumption...........................................................................................................................................................................221
Paper use............................................................................................................................................................................................221
Plastics................................................................................................................................................................................................222
HP LaserJet print supplies ...............................................................................................................................................................222
Paper...................................................................................................................................................................................................222
Material restrictions ..........................................................................................................................................................................222
Battery information ..........................................................................................................................................................................222
Disposal of waste equipment by users (EU, UK, and India)........................................................................................................223
Electronic hardware recycling .........................................................................................................................................................223
Brazil hardware recycling information...........................................................................................................................................223
Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................................................223
Product Power Data per European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 and the UK Relevant
Statutory Requirements...................................................................................................................................................................224
SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China)........................................................................................................................................224
The regulation of the implementation on China energy label for printer, fax, and copier.....................................................224
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India)............................................................................................................224
WEEE (Turkey)....................................................................................................................................................................................224
Substances Table (China) .................................................................................................................................................................225
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................................................................................225
EPEAT ..................................................................................................................................................................................................225
Substances Table (Taiwan)...............................................................................................................................................................226
ix
For more information .......................................................................................................................................................................226
Appendix C Regulatory information .......................................................................................................................................................227
Regulatory statements ....................................................................................................................................................................227
Regulatory model identication numbers............................................................................................................................227
European Union & United Kingdom Regulatory Notice......................................................................................................227
FCC regulations.........................................................................................................................................................................228
Canada - Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Statement ...........................................................................................228
VCCI statement (Japan)............................................................................................................................................................228
EMC statement (Korea)............................................................................................................................................................228
EMC statement (China) ............................................................................................................................................................228
Power cord instructions...........................................................................................................................................................228
Power cord statement (Japan)...............................................................................................................................................229
Laser safety...............................................................................................................................................................................229
Laser statement for Finland...................................................................................................................................................229
Nordic Statements (Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden).................................................................................................230
GS statement (Germany).........................................................................................................................................................230
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia)....................................................................231
EMI statement (Taiwan)...........................................................................................................................................................232
Product stability........................................................................................................................................................................232
Telecom (fax) statements ................................................................................................................................................................232
Fax Cord Statement .................................................................................................................................................................232
EU and UK Statement for Telecom Operation......................................................................................................................232
Brazil (Portugueses) ................................................................................................................................................................232
New Zealand Telecom Statements........................................................................................................................................232
Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US).........................................................................................................233
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) ............................................................................................................................233
Industry Canada CS-03 requirements ..................................................................................................................................233
Japan Telecom Mark.................................................................................................................................................................234
Belarus.......................................................................................................................................................................................235
Index.............................................................................................................................................................................................................237
x
Printer overview1
Review the location of features on the printer, the physical and technical specications of the printer, and where
to locate setup information.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Warning icons
Use caution if you see a warning icon on your HP printer, as indicated in the icon denitions.
● Caution: Electric shock
● Caution: Hot surface
● Caution: Keep body parts away from moving parts
Printer overview
1
● Caution: Sharp edge in close proximity
● Warning
Potential shock hazard
Review this important safety information.
● Read and understand these safety statements to avoid an electrical shock hazard.
● Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce risk of injury from re or electric
shock.
● Read and understand all instructions in the user guide.
● Observe all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
● Use only a grounded electrical outlet when connecting the product to a power source. If you do not know
whether the outlet is grounded, check with a qualied electrician.
● Do not touch the contacts on any of the sockets on the product. Replace damaged cords immediately.
● Unplug this product from wall outlets before cleaning.
● Do not install or use this product near water or when you are wet.
● Install the product securely on a stable surface.
● Install the product in a protected location where no one can step on or trip over the power cord.
2
Chapter 1 Printer overview
Printer views
Identify certain parts of the printer and the control panel.
Printer front view
Identify the parts on the front of the printer.
Figure 1-1 Printer front view
8
7
6
5
11
1
3
4
2
9
10
Number Description
1 Document feeder
2 Regulatory label (inside the front door)
3 Tray 2
4 Tray 1
5 Power on/o button
6 Front door (provides toner cartridge access)
7 Output bin extension
8 Output bin
9 Easy-access USB port (for printing and scanning without a computer)
10 Touchscreen control panel (tilts up for easier viewing)
11 Scanner
Printer back view
Identify the parts on the back of the printer.
Printer views
3
Figure 1-2 Printer rear view
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
Number Description
1 Front door release button
2 Fax ports cover
NOTE: The fax ports are behind the cover.
3 USB port for job storage or connecting accessories
4 USB port for direct connection to a computer
5 Ethernet port
6 Power connection
7 Rear door (provides access for clearing jams)
Control-panel view
Use the touchscreen control panel to obtain printer and job status information, and to congure the printer.
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer conguration.
4 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Figure 1-3 Printer control panel
?
i
Reset Sign In
Copy Scan
Print
4
2
3
1
8
5
6
7
Number Item Description
1 Reset button Select the Reset button to clear changes, release the printer
from a paused state, display hidden errors, and restore the
default settings (including the language and keyboard layout).
2 Sign In or Sign Out button Select the Sign In button to open the Sign In screen.
Select the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The
printer restores all options to the default settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has
congured the printer to require permission for access to
features.
3
Information button Select the Information button to access a screen that
provides access to several types of printer information. Select
the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following
information:
● Display Language: Change the language setting for the
current user session.
● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect
directly to the printer using a phone, tablet, or other
device with Wi-Fi. (Wireless features available with
optional wireless accessories installed.)
● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings.
(Wireless features available with optional wireless
accessories installed.)
● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.
● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print
to the printer using HP Web Services (ePrint).
Control-panel view 5
Number Item Description
4
Help button Select the Help button to open the embedded help
system.
The system provides a list of help topics or information about
a topic when using the Home screen, an app, an option, or a
feature.
5 Copy button Touch the Copy button to start a copy job.
6 Number of copies eld Touch the eld to adjust the number of copies to be printed.
7 Applications area Select any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the
screen sideways to access more applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The
administrator can congure which applications appear and the
order in which they appear.
8 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an
application. The current page is highlighted. Swipe the screen
sideways to scroll between pages.
How to use the touchscreen control panel
Perform the following actions to use the printer touchscreen control panel.
Table 1-1
Touchscreen control panel actions
Action Description Example
Touch Touch an item on the screen to select that item
or open that menu. Also, when scrolling through
menus, briey touch the screen to stop the
scrolling.
Touch the Settings icon to open the Settings app.
Swipe Touch the screen and then move your nger
horizontally to scroll the screen sideways.
Swipe until the Settings app displays.
Scroll Touch the screen and then move your nger
vertically to scroll the screen up and down. When
scrolling through menus, briey touch the screen
to stop the scrolling.
Scroll through the Settings app.
6 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Table 1-1 Touchscreen control panel actions (continued)
Action Description Example
Printer specications
Determine the specications for your printer model.
Technical specications
Review the technical specications for the printer.
Product numbers for each model
● M480f - #3QA55A
Table 1-2
Paper handling specications
Paper handling features M480f
Tray 1 (50-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional
Automatic duplex printing
Table 1-3 Connectivity specications
Connectivity features M480f
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Walk-up USB port
HP Jetdirect LAN accessory Optional
HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and proximity badge reading Optional
Table 1-4 Print specications
Print features M480f
Prints up to 27 pages per minute (ppm) on A4, and up to 29 ppm on letter-sized paper.
Printer specications 7
Table 1-4 Print specications (continued)
Print features M480f
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-5 Copy and scan specications
Copy and scan features M480f
Copy speed color single-sided: 27 cpm A4, 28 cpm letter
Copy speed color duplex: 24 cpm A4, 25 cpm letter
Scan speed single-sided A4: Up to 29 ppm/46 ipm (Black & White), up to 20 ppm/35 ipm
(Color)
Scan speed single-sided Letter: Up to 31 ppm/49 ipm (Black & White), up to 21 ppm/37 ipm
(Color)
NOTE: Copy and scan speeds are subject to change.
50-page document feeder with dual-head scanning for single-pass duplex copying and
scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to Network Folder options
Table 1-6 Other specications
Other features M480f
2 GB base memory
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC)
Color touchscreen control panel
Fax features
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that passes through the printer
HP Accessibility Kit Optional
HP Accessibility Assistant Optional
HP USB Universal Card Reader Optional
HP LEGIC Card Reader Optional
Supported operating systems
Use the following information to ensure printer compatibility with your computer operating system.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
The following information applies to the printer-specic Windows HP PCL 6 print drivers, HP print drivers for
macOS, and to the software installer.
8
Chapter 1 Printer overview
Windows: Download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com to install the HP print driver. Or, go to the printer-support
website for this printer: http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP to download the print driver or the
software installer to install the HP print driver.
macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com or from
the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver.
1. Go to 123.hp.com.
2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.
Table 1-7 Supported operating systems and print drivers
Operating system Print driver (for Windows, or the installer on the web for macOS)
Windows 7, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation.
Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation. For server-client installations, load the print driver on the client
prior to connecting to the server.
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation. For server-client installations, load the print driver on the client
prior to connecting to the server.
Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer Wizard to install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer Wizard to install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer Wizard to install it.
Windows Server 2016, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer Wizard to install it.
Windows Server 2019, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer Wizard to install it.
macOS 10.13 High Sierra, macOS 10.14
Mojave, macOS 10.15 Catalina
Download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com, and then use it to install the print driver.
NOTE: Supported operating systems can change.
NOTE: For a current list of supported operating systems and HP’s all-inclusive help for the printer, go to http://
www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go to
www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click Specications.
Table 1-8
Minimum system requirements
Windows macOS
● Internet connection
● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection
● 2 GB of available hard-disk space
● Internet connection
● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection
● 1.5 GB of available hard-disk space
Supported operating systems 9
Table 1-8 Minimum system requirements
Windows macOS
● 1 GB RAM (32-bit) or 2 GB RAM (64-bit)
NOTE: The Windows software installer installs the HP Smart Device Agent Base service. The le size is less
than 100 kb. Its only function is to check for printers connected via USB hourly. No data is collected. If a USB
printer is found, it then tries to locate a JetAdvantage Management Connector (JAMc) instance on the network. If
a JAMc is found, the HP Smart Device Agent Base is securely upgraded to a full Smart Device Agent from JAMc,
which will then allow printed pages to be accounted for in a Managed Print Services (MPS) account. The driver-
only web packs downloaded from
www.hp.com for the printer and installed through the Add Printer wizard do
not install this service.
To uninstall the service, open the Control Panel, select Programs or Programs and Features, and
then select Add/Remove Programs or Uninstall a Program to remove the service. The le name is
HPSmartDeviceAgentBase.
Mobile printing solutions
HP oers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device.
To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
NOTE: Update the printer rmware to ensure all mobile printing capabilities are supported.
● Wi-Fi Direct (with HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory installed)
● HP ePrint via email (requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)
● Google Cloud Print
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
● HP Roam
Printer dimensions
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.
10 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Figure 1-4 Dimensions for the M480f model
1
1
2
2
3
3
Table 1-9 Dimensions for the M480f model
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 415.4 mm (16.35 in) 415.4 mm (16.35 in)
2. Height 399.8 mm (15.74 in) 656 mm (25.83 in)
3. Depth 472 mm (18.59 in) 1038 mm (40.9 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 23.3 kg (51.37 lb) 23.3 kg (51.37 lb)
Table 1-10 Dimensions for the optional 550-sheet tray
Measurement Tray fully closed Tray fully opened
1. Width 412 mm (16.2 in) 412 mm (16.2 in)
2. Height 132 mm (5.2 in) 132 mm (5.2 in)
3. Depth 453 mm (17.8 in) 655 mm (25.8 in)
Weight 5.2 kg (11.5 lb) 5.2 kg (11.5 lb)
Printer dimensions 11
Figure 1-5 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray
1
2
3
2
3
1
Table 1-11 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 415.4 mm (16.35 in) 415.4 mm (16.35 in)
2. Height 531.8 mm (20.93 in) 788 mm (31.02 in)
3. Depth 472.3 mm (18.59 in) 1038 mm (40.9 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 28.5 kg (62.83 lb) 28.5 kg (62.83 lb)
Power consumption
Review the power consumption for each printer status or function.
Table 1-12
Power consumption (average, in watts)
Printing Ready Sleep Auto-O/Manual-On Manual O
581 W 21.9 W 1.0 W 0.08 W 0.08 W
Electrical specications
Review the electrical specications for the printer.
NOTE: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. The values in the
following table are subject to change.
CAUTION: Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Table 1-13
Recommended voltage
Specication 110-volt models 220-volt models
Power requirements (Volts)
1
110 to 127 volts (± 10%) 220 to 240 volts (± 10%)
12 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Table 1-13 Recommended voltage
Specication 110-volt models 220-volt models
60 Hz (± 3 Hz) 50/60 Hz (± 3 Hz)
1
Power reported is highest value measured for all printer models using standard voltages.
Acoustic emissions
Review the acoustic emissions, including sound power level and sound pressure level.
Table 1-14 Sound power level
Acoustics: Sound power level (pages per minute (ppm)) Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (27 ppm)
L
wAD = 6.1 Bels(A)
Scanning
L
wAD = 6.0 Bels(A)
Ready
L
wAD = 3.6 Bels(A)
Table 1-15 Sound pressure level
Acoustics: Sound pressure level (pages per minute (ppm)) Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (27 ppm)
L
pAm = 49 dB(A)
Scanning
L
pAm = 46 dB(A)
Ready
L
pAm = 20 dB(A)
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specications.
Table 1-16
Operating-environment specications
Environment Recommended Storage
Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH
Printer hardware setup and software installation
For basic setup instructions, see the Hardware Installation Guide that came with the printer. For additional
instructions, go to HP support on the web.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer, which includes the
following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
Acoustic emissions
13
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
● Find instructions about how to use the Microsoft Add Printer tool
14 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Paper trays2
Discover how to load and use the paper trays, including how to load special items such as envelopes and labels.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Introduction
Use caution when loading the paper trays.
CAUTION: Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.
Do not use paper tray as a step.
All trays must be closed while moving the printer.
Keep hands out of paper trays or drawers when closing.
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
The following information describes how to load paper into Tray 1.
Load Paper Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Follow these steps to load paper in Tray 1.
This tray holds up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
Paper trays
15
1. Open Tray 1 by grasping the handles on the left and right side of the tray and pulling down.
2. Slide out the tray extension.
3. Press down on the tab on the right paper guide, and then spread the paper guides to the correct size.
16 Chapter 2 Paper trays
4. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the paper ts under the tabs and below the maximum height
indicators.
For information on how to orient the paper, see Tray 1 paper orientation on page 17.
5. At the computer, begin the printing process from the software application. Make sure that the driver is set to
the correct paper type and size for the paper being printed from the tray.
Tray 1 paper orientation
When using paper that requires a specic orientation, load it according to the information in the following table.
Table 2-1
Tray 1 paper orientation
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or preprinted 1-sided printing Face-up
Top edge leading into the printer
12
3
Letterhead or preprinted 2-sided printing Face-down
Top edge away from the printer
Tray 1 paper orientation 17
Table 2-1 Tray 1 paper orientation (continued)
Paper type Output How to load paper
1
23
Pre-punched 1-sided or 2-sided printing Face-up
Holes toward the left side of the printer
12
3
Load paper to Tray 2
Review the following information about loading paper to Tray 2.
Load paper Tray 2
Follow these steps to load paper in Tray 2.
This tray holds up to 250 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper.
18
Chapter 2 Paper trays
1. Open Tray 2.
2. Adjust the paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches on the guides and then sliding the
guides to the size of the paper being used.
3. To load legal-size paper, extend the tray front by squeezing the front latch and pulling the front of the tray.
NOTE: When loaded with legal-size paper, Tray 2 extends from the front of the printer approximately (2
in)51 mm.
Load paper Tray 2
19
4. Load the paper into the tray.
For information about how to orient the paper, see Tray 2 paper orientation on page 21.
5. Make sure that the paper stack is at at all four corners. Slide the paper length and width guides so that
they are against the stack of paper.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray. Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray full
indicator.
6. After making sure that the paper stack is below the tray full indicator, close the tray.
20 Chapter 2 Paper trays
NOTE: When loaded with legal-size paper, Tray 2 does not close all of the way.
7. At the computer, begin the printing process from the software application. Make sure that the driver is set to
the correct paper type and size for the paper being printed from the tray.
Tray 2 paper orientation
When using paper that requires a specic orientation, load it according to the information in the following table.
Table 2-2 Tray 2 paper orientation
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or preprinted 1-sided printing Face-up
Top edge toward the printer.
123
Letterhead or preprinted 2-sided printing Face-down
Top edge away from the printer
1
23
Prepunched 1-sided printing or 2-sided
printing
Face-up
Holes toward the left side of the printer
Tray 2 paper orientation 21
Table 2-2 Tray 2 paper orientation (continued)
Paper type Output How to load paper
123
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
Load paper to Tray 3 (optional accessory)
Review the following information about loading paper to Tray 3.
Load paper Tray 3
Follow these steps to load paper in Tray 3.
This tray holds up to 550 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper.
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes, labels, or unsupported sizes of paper from Tray 3. Print these types of
paper only from Tray 1.
22
Chapter 2 Paper trays
1. Open Tray 3.
2. Adjust the paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches on the guides and then sliding the
guides to the size of the paper being used.
3. To load legal-size paper, extend the tray front by squeezing the front latch and pulling the front of the tray.
4. Load paper into the tray.
For information about how to orient the paper, see Tray 3 paper orientation on page 24.
Load paper Tray 3
23
5. Make sure that the paper stack is at at all four corners. Slide the paper length and width guides so that
they are against the stack of paper.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray. Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray full
indicator.
6. After making sure that the paper stack is below the tray full indicator, close the tray.
7. At the computer, begin the printing process from the software application. Make sure that the driver is set to
the correct paper type and size for the paper being printed from the tray.
Tray 3 paper orientation
When using paper that requires a
specic orientation, load it according to the information in the following table.
Table 2-3
Tray 3 paper orientation
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or preprinted 1-sided printing Face-up
Top edge toward the printer.
24 Chapter 2 Paper trays
Table 2-3 Tray 3 paper orientation (continued)
Paper type Output How to load paper
123
Letterhead or preprinted 2-sided printing Face-down
Top edge away from the printer
Prepunched 1-sided printing or 2-sided
printing
Face-up
Holes on left side of the printer
123
Tray 3 paper orientation 25
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
Load and print envelopes
Review the following information about loading and printing envelopes.
Use either Tray 1 or Tray 2 to print envelopes. Tray 1 holds up to 10 envelopes.
To print envelopes using the manual feed option, follow these steps to select the correct settings in the print
driver, and then load the envelopes into the tray after sending the print job to the printer.
In addition to the instructions provided below, you can view the following video of how to load and print
envelopes:
Print envelopes
To print envelopes, follow these steps.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click or tap the Properties or Preferences button to open
the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
3. Click or tap the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the envelopes.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Envelope.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
7. Click the Finishing tab.
8. If the Print on both sides option is selected, clear the option check box.
9. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
26
Chapter 2 Paper trays
10. In the Print dialog box, click the Print button to print the job.
Envelope orientation
When using envelopes, load them according to the information in the following table.
Table 2-4 Envelope orientation
Tray How to load
Tray 1 Face-up
Short, postage-end leading into the printer
Tray 2 Face-up
Short, postage-end leading into the printer
Load and print labels
To print on sheets of labels, use Tray 1 or Tray 2.
Envelope orientation
27
Manually feed labels
Use the manual feed mode to print sheets of labels.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print, and
then select the printer.
NOTE: To access these features from Windows 10, select Print, and then select the printer.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the sheets of labels.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Labels.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
NOTE: When using manual feed, the printer prints from the lowest-numbered tray that is congured for
the correct size of paper, so it is not necessary to specify a particular tray. For example, if Tray 2 is
congured for labels, the printer will print from Tray 2. If Tray 3 is installed and congured for labels, but
Tray 2 is not congured for labels, the printer will print from Tray 3.
7. Click the Finishing tab.
8. If the Print on both sides option is selected, clear the option check box.
9. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
10. In the Print dialog box, click the Print button to print the job.
Label orientation
Labels need to be loaded in a specic manner in order to print correctly.
Table 2-5
How to load labels
Tray How to load labels
Tray 1 Load sheets of labels face-up with the top of the sheet leading into the printer.
28 Chapter 2 Paper trays
Table 2-5 How to load labels (continued)
Tray How to load labels
Tray 2 Load sheets of labels face-up with the top of the sheet at the back of the tray.
Label orientation 29
30 Chapter 2 Paper trays
Supplies, accessories, and parts3
Order supplies or accessories, replace the toner cartridges, or remove and replace another part.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Order supplies, accessories, and parts
Find out how to obtain replacement supplies, accessories, and parts for the printer.
Ordering
Order parts, supplies, or accessories through one of the following channels.
Table 3-1
Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter
the printer IP address or host name in the address/URL eld. The
EWS contains a link to the HP website, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.
Supplies and accessories
Find information about the supplies and accessories that are available for your printer.
NOTE: Cartridges are listed based on regional distribution and availability. A cartridge from any country/region
will work in this printer.
Supplies, accessories, and parts
31
Table 3-2 Supplies - For distribution in North America and Latin America only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 414A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
414A W2020A
HP 414A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
414A W2021A
HP 414A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
414A W2022A
HP 414A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
414A W2023A
HP 414X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
414X W2020X
HP 414X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
414X W2021X
HP 414X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
414X W2022X
HP 414X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
414X W2023X
Table 3-3 Supplies - For distribution in Europe, Middle East, Russia, CIS, and Africa only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 415A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
415A W2030A
HP 415A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
415A W2031A
HP 415A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
415A W2032A
HP 415A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
415A W2033A
HP 415X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
415X W2030X
HP 415X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
415X W2031X
HP 415X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
415X W2032X
HP 415X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
415X W2033X
Table 3-4 Supplies - For distribution in Asia Pacic Countries/Regions only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 416A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
416A W2040A
HP 416A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
416A W2041A
32 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Table 3-4 Supplies - For distribution in Asia Pacic Countries/Regions only (continued)
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 416A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
416A W2042A
HP 416A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
416A W2043A
HP 416X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
416X W2040X
HP 416X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
416X W2041X
HP 416X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
416X W2042X
HP 416X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
416X W2043X
Table 3-5 Accessories
Item Description Part number
HP LaserJet 550-sheet Paper Tray Optional (Tray 3) 550-sheet paper feeder CF404A
HP Jetdirect LAN accessory HP Jetdirect accessory for network
connectivity
8FP31A
HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless
Accessory
HP Jetdirect accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC,
and proximity badge reading
3JN69A
HP Accessibility Kit Accessibility tools including an accessible
keyboard, prop handle, and braille labels
2TD64A
HP Accessibility Assistant Compact device to add voice command and
screen reader functions to the printer
2MU47A
HP USB Universal Card Reader Multiple-protocol proximity card reader X3D03A
HP LEGIC Card Reader Authentication card reader 4QL32A
Customer self-repair parts
Customer Self-Repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.
More information about the CSR program and benets can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-support and
www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.
Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-authorized
service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number, serial number
(found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.
● Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers, unless you are willing to pay
HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not
provided under the HP printer warranty.
● Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service personnel at your request for no
additional charge during the printer warranty period.
Customer self-repair parts
33
Table 3-6 Customer self-repair parts
Item Description Self-replacement options Part number
150-sheet paper input tray Replacement cassette for Tray 2 Mandatory RM2-6377-000CN
550-sheet paper feeder Replacement optional Tray 3 assembly Mandatory CF404-67901
Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings
A network administrator can congure the toner-cartridge-protection settings using the printer control panel or
the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Introduction
Use HP Cartridge Policy and Cartridge Protection to control which cartridges are installed in the printer and
protect the cartridges that are installed from theft.
In HP Web Jetadmin, the settings are located under the Device Management pane in the following menu chain:
Cong > Supplies > Cartridge Policy or Cartridge Protection.
● Cartridge Policy: This feature protects the printer from counterfeit toner cartridges by allowing only genuine
HP cartridges to be used with the printer. Using genuine HP cartridges ensures the best possible print
quality. When someone installs a cartridge that is not a genuine HP cartridge, the printer control panel
displays a message that the cartridge is unauthorized and it provides information explaining how to proceed.
● Cartridge Protection: This feature permanently associates toner cartridges with a specic printer, or eet
of printers, so they cannot be used in other printers. Protecting cartridges protects your investment. When
this feature is enabled, if someone attempts to transfer a protected cartridge from the original printer into
an unauthorized printer, that printer will not print with the protected cartridge. The printer control panel
displays a message that the cartridge is protected, and it provides information explaining how to proceed.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
The Cartridge Policy feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web Server
(EWS).
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords cannot
be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows only
genuine HP cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
34
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select Authorized HP.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This removes
the restriction that only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select O.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows only genuine HP
cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Authorized HP from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This removes the restriction that
only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
35
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE:
If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select O from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Cartridge Policy error messages.
Table 3-7
Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.30 Unauthorized <Color> Cartridge The administrator has congured this
printer to use only genuine HP supplies that
are still under warranty. The cartridge must
be replaced to continue printing.
Replace the cartridge with a genuine HP
toner cartridge.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, visit www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit
to determine if the toner cartridge is a
genuine HP cartridge, and learn what to do if
it is not a genuine HP cartridge.
Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature
The Cartridge Protection feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web Server
(EWS).
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords cannot
be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Protection feature. This protects
the cartridges associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
36
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
b. Cartridge Protection
3. Select Protect Cartridges.
4. When the printer prompts to conrm, select Continue to enable the feature.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Protection feature. This
removes protection for any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Protection
3. Select O.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Protection feature. This protects the cartridges
associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Protect cartridges from the Cartridge Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
37
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Protection feature. This removes protection for
any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select O from the Cartridge Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Troubleshoot Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Cartridge Protection error messages.
Table 3-8
Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.57 Protected <Color> Cartridge The cartridge can only be used in the printer
or eet of printers that initially protected it
using HP Cartridge Protection.
The Cartridge Protection feature allows an
administrator to restrict cartridges to work
in only one printer or eet of printers. The
cartridge must be replaced to continue
printing.
Replace the cartridge with a new toner
cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridges
Replace the toner cartridges if you receive a message on the printer, or if you have print quality problems.
Toner cartridge information
The printer indicates when the toner cartridge level is low. The actual toner cartridge life remaining can vary.
Consider having a replacement cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
38
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
The printer uses four colors and has a dierent toner cartridge for each color: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y),
and black (K). The toner cartridges are inside the front door.
Continue printing with the current cartridge until redistributing the toner no longer yields acceptable print quality.
To redistribute the toner, remove the toner cartridge from the printer and gently rock the cartridge back and forth
end to end. For graphical representation, see the cartridge replacement instructions. Reinsert the toner cartridge
into the printer, and then close the cover.
To purchase cartridges or check cartridge compatibility for the printer, go to HP SureSupply at http://
www.hp.com/go/suresupply. Scroll to the bottom of the page and verify that the country/region is correct.
NOTE: Cartridges are listed based on regional distribution and availability. A cartridge from any country/region
will work in this printer.
Table 3-9 Supplies - For distribution in North America and Latin America only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 414A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
414A W2020A
HP 414A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
414A W2021A
HP 414A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
414A W2022A
HP 414A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
414A W2023A
HP 414X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
414X W2020X
HP 414X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
414X W2021X
HP 414X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
414X W2022X
HP 414X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
414X W2023X
Table 3-10 Supplies - For distribution in Europe, Middle East, Russia, CIS, and Africa only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 415A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
415A W2030A
HP 415A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
415A W2031A
HP 415A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
415A W2032A
HP 415A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
415A W2033A
HP 415X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
415X W2030X
HP 415X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
415X W2031X
Toner cartridge information 39
Table 3-10 Supplies - For distribution in Europe, Middle East, Russia, CIS, and Africa only (continued)
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 415X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
415X W2032X
HP 415X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
415X W2033X
Table 3-11 Supplies - For distribution in Asia Pacic Countries/Regions only
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 416A Black Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
416A W2040A
HP 416A Cyan Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
cyan toner cartridge
416A W2041A
HP 416A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
416A W2042A
HP 416A Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Standard-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
416A W2043A
HP 416X High Yield Black
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
black toner cartridge
416X W2040X
HP 416X High Yield Cyan
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement cyan
toner cartridge
416X W2041X
HP 416X High Yield Yellow
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
yellow toner cartridge
416X W2042X
HP 416X High Yield Magenta
Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-capacity replacement
magenta toner cartridge
416X W2043X
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it is time to replace it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. If
the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended period of time, place the cartridge in the
original plastic packaging, or cover the cartridge with a lightweight opaque item.
The following illustration shows the toner cartridge components.
Figure 3-1 Toner cartridge components
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
40 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Number Description
1 Imaging drum
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints can cause print-quality problems.
2 Handle
3 Memory chip
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it o by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used toner cartridges is in the toner cartridge box.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges
Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
1. Open the front door by pressing the button on the left panel.
1
2
2. Grasp the blue handle on the toner cartridge drawer, and then pull out the drawer.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges 41
3. Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge, and then pull the toner cartridge straight up to remove it.
4. Remove the new toner cartridge package from the box, and then pull the release tab on the packaging.
5. Remove the toner cartridge from the opened packaging shell. Place the used toner cartridge in the shell for
recycling.
42 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
6. Holding the toner cartridge on both ends, gently rock the cartridge end to end to distribute the toner evenly
inside the cartridge.
7. Do not touch the imaging drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can
cause print-quality problems. Also, do not expose the cartridge to light unnecessarily.
8. Insert the new toner cartridge into the drawer. Make sure that the color chip on the cartridge matches the
color chip on the drawer.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges 43
9. Close the toner cartridge drawer.
10. Close the front door.
11. Pack the used toner cartridge into the box the new cartridge came in, or use a large cardboard box and
ll it with several cartridges you need to recycle. See the enclosed recycling guide for information about
recycling.
In the US, a pre-paid shipping label is included in the box. In other countries/regions, go to
www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the box, and return the used cartridge to HP for recycling.
http://www.hp.com/recycle
2
1
44 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Print4
Print using the software, or print from a mobile device or USB ash drive.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Print tasks (Windows)
Learn about common printing tasks for Windows users.
How to print (Windows)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for Windows.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers. To change settings, click the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
NOTE: For more information, click the Help (?) button in the print driver.
Print
45
3. Click the tabs in the print driver to congure the available options. For example, set the paper orientation on
the Finishing tab, and set the paper source, paper type, paper size, and quality settings on the Paper/Quality
tab.
4. Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. Select the number of copies to print from this screen.
5. Click the Print button to print the job.
Automatically print on both sides (Windows)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper. Use a
paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Manually print on both sides (Windows)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that the
duplexer does not support.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
46
Chapter 4 Print
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides (manually), and then click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the rst side of the job.
6. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin, and place it in Tray 1.
7. If prompted, select the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print multiple
pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very large
document and want to save paper.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-down.
5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options. Click OK to close the Document
Properties dialog.
6. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Select the paper type (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are using for
your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a dierent paper type for a print
job, select that specic paper type.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
47
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Select the paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.
5. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
If the tray needs to be congured, a tray conguration message displays on the printer control panel.
6. Load the tray with the specied type and size of paper, and then close the tray.
7. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
8. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
● Select the page orientation
● Create a booklet
● Scale a document to t a specic paper size
● Print the rst or last pages of the document on dierent paper
● Print watermarks on a document
Print tasks (macOS)
Print using the HP printing software for macOS, including how to print on both sides or print multiple pages per
sheet.
How to print (macOS)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for macOS.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
48
Chapter 4 Print
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then select other menus to adjust the print settings.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Click the Print button.
Automatically print on both sides (macOS)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper. Use a
paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
NOTE: This information applies to printers that include an automatic duplexer.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint
®
.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
macOS 10.14 Mojave and later: Click Show Details, click Two-Sided, and then click the Layout menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Select a binding option from the Two-Sided drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Manually print on both sides (macOS)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that the
duplexer does not support.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Manual Duplex menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Click the Manual Duplex box, and select a binding option.
5. Click the Print button.
6. Go to the printer and remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1.
7. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin and place it with the printed-side facing down in the input
tray.
8. If prompted, touch the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Automatically print on both sides (macOS)
49
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print multiple
pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very large
document and want to save paper.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. From the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet.
5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
7. Click the Print button.
Select the paper type (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are using for
your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a dierent paper type for a print
job, select that specic paper type.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Media & Quality menu or the Paper/Quality menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Select from the Media & Quality or Paper/Quality options.
NOTE: This list contains the master set of options available. Some options are not available on all printers.
● Media Type: Select the option for the type of paper for the print job.
● Print Quality or Quality: Select the resolution level for the print job.
● Edge-To-Edge Printing: Select this option to print close to the paper edges.
5. Click the Print button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
50
Chapter 4 Print
● Select the page orientation
● Create a booklet
● Scale a document to t a specic paper size
● Print the rst or last pages of the document on dierent paper
● Print watermarks on a document
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately
Store print jobs in the printer memory for printing at a later time.
Introduction
The following information provides procedures for creating and printing documents that are stored on the USB
ash drive. These jobs can be printed at a later time or printed privately.
Create a stored job (Windows)
Store jobs on the USB
ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then select Properties or Preferences.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features when
More settings is selected.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
4. Select a Job Storage Mode option:
● Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies.
● Personal Job: The job does not print until you request it at the printer control panel. For this job-storage
mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign a personal identication
number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel. If you encrypt the job,
you must provide the required password at the control panel. The print job is deleted from memory
after it prints and is lost if the printer loses power.
● Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the printer
memory so you can print it again later.
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately
51
● Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. For this
job-storage mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign a personal
identication number (PIN) to the job, the person who prints the job must provide the required PIN
at the control panel. If you encrypt the job, the person who prints the job must provide the required
password at the control panel.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job
name.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name:
● Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
● Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the Print
button to print the job.
Create a stored job (macOS)
Store jobs on the USB ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Job Storage menu.
NOTE: If the Job Storage menu is not showing, follow the instructions in the "Disable or enable job storage
feature" section to activate the menu.
4. In the Mode drop-down list, select the type of stored job.
● Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies. The rst copy prints
immediately. Printing of the subsequent copies must be initiated from the device's front control panel.
For example, if 10 copies are sent, one copy prints immediately, and the other nine copies will print
when the job is retrieved. The job is deleted after all copies are printed.
● Personal Job: The job does not print until someone requests it at the printer control panel. If the job
has a personal identication number (PIN), provide the required PIN at the control panel. The print job is
deleted from memory after it prints.
● Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the printer
memory to print it again later. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
● Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. If the job has
a personal identication number (PIN), the person who prints the job must provide the required PIN at
the control panel. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job
name.
NOTE: macOS 10.14 Mojave and later: The print driver no longer includes the Custom button. Use the
options below the Mode drop-down list to set up the saved job.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.
● Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
52
Chapter 4 Print
● Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. If you selected the Stored Job or Personal Job option in the Mode drop-down list, you can protect the job
with a PIN. Type a 4-digit number in the Use PIN to Print eld. When other people attempt to print this job,
the printer prompts them to enter this PIN.
7. Click the Print button to process the job.
Print a stored job
Use the following procedure to print a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select the name of the folder where the job is stored, or select Choose to see the folder list.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. To adjust the number of copies, select the number of copies eld. Use the keypad to enter the number of
copies to print.
6. Select Start or Print to print the job.
Delete a stored job
You can delete documents that have been saved to the printer when they are no longer needed. You can also
adjust the maximum number of jobs for the printer to store.
Delete a job that is stored on the printer
Use the control panel to delete a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select the name of the folder where the job is stored or select Choose to see the folder list.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. Select the Trash button to delete the job.
Change the job storage limit
When a new job is stored in the printer memory, the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same user
and job name. If a job is not already stored under the same user and job name, and the printer needs additional
space, the printer might delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest.
To change the number of jobs that the printer can store, complete the following procedure:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
Print a stored job
53
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Stored Jobs
c. Temporary Job Storage Limit
3. Use the keypad to enter the number of jobs that the printer stores.
4. Select OK or Done to save the setting.
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes
Printing jobs sent from drivers on the client (e.g., PC) may send personally identiable information to HP’s
Printing and Imaging devices. This information may include, but is not limited to, user name and client name from
which the job originated that may be used for job accounting purposes, as determined by the Administrator of
the printing device. This same information may also be stored with the job on the mass storage device (e.g., disk
drive) of the printing device when using the job storage feature.
Mobile printing
Mobile and ePrint solutions enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet, smartphone, or other
mobile device.
Introduction
HP
oers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device.
To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing
HP provides Wi-Fi Direct Print, Near Field Communication (NFC), and Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) printing for
printers with a supported HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accessory. This is an optional accessory.
These features enable Wi-Fi capable (mobile) devices to make a wireless network connection directly to the
printer without using a wireless router.
The printer does not need to be connected to the network for this mobile walk-up printing to work.
Use Wi-Fi Direct Print to print wirelessly from the following devices:
● iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using Apple AirPrint
● Android mobile devices using the Android embedded print solution
For more information on wireless printing, go to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
NFC, BLE, and Wi-Fi Direct Print capabilities can be enabled or disabled from the printer control panel.
Enable wireless printing
To print wirelessly from mobile devices, Wi-Fi Direct must be turned on.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
54
Chapter 4 Print
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Status
3. Select On, and then select OK to enable wireless printing.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct name
Change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
NOTE: In environments where more than one model of the same printer is installed, it might be helpful to
provide each printer a unique Wi-Fi Direct Name for easier printer identication for HP Wi-Fi Direct printing. The
Wireless network names, e.g., Wireless, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are available on the Information screen by selecting
the Information icon , and then selecting the Wi-Fi Direct icon .
Complete the following procedure to change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Wi-Fi Direct Name
3. Use the keypad to change the name in the Wi-Fi Direct Name text eld, and then select OK.
HP ePrint via email
Use HP ePrint via email to print documents by sending them as an email attachment to the printer's email
address from any email enabled device.
To use HP ePrint via email, the printer must meet these requirements:
● The printer must be connected to a wired or wireless network and have Internet access.
● HP Web Services must be enabled on the printer, and the printer must be registered with HP Smart.
Follow this procedure to enable HP Web Services and register with HP Smart:
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. From a computer on the same network as the printer, open a web browser. In the address line, type
the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key
on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct name
55
2. Click the HP Web Services tab.
3. Select the option to enable Web Services.
NOTE: Enabling Web Services might take several minutes.
4. Go to www.hpconnected.com to create an account and complete the setup process.
AirPrint
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS and from Mac computers running macOS 10.7 Lion and
newer.
Use AirPrint to print directly to the printer from an iPad, iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod touch (third generation or
later) in the following mobile applications:
● Mail
● Photos
● Safari
● iBooks
● Select third-party applications
To use AirPrint, the printer must be connected to the same network (sub-net) as the Apple device. For
more information about using AirPrint and about which HP printers are compatible with AirPrint, go to
www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
NOTE: Before using AirPrint with a USB connection, verify the version number. AirPrint versions 1.3 and earlier
do not support USB connections.
Android embedded printing
HP's built-in print solution for Android and Kindle enables mobile devices to automatically nd and print to HP
printers that are either on a network or within wireless range for Wi-Fi Direct printing.
The print solution is built into many versions of the operating system.
NOTE: If printing is not available on your device, go to the Google Play > Android apps and install the HP Print
Service Plugin.
For more information on how to use Android embedded printing and which Android devices are supported, go to
www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
Print from a USB
ash drive
This printer features easy-access USB printing to print les without a computer.
The printer accepts standard USB ash drives in the USB port near the control panel. It supports the following
types of les:
● .pdf
● .prn
56
Chapter 4 Print
● .pcl
● .ps
● .cht
Enable the USB port for printing
The USB port is disabled by default. Before using this feature, enable the USB port.
Use one of the following methods to enable the port:
Method one: Enable the USB port from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Enable Device USB
3. Select Enable Print from USB Drive.
Method two: Enable the USB port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers
only)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address exactly as it displays on the printer control
panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
3. Select the Copy/Print tab for MFP models or the Print tab for SFP models.
4. In the left menu, select Print from USB Drive Settings.
5. Select Enable Print from USB Drive.
6. Click Apply.
Print USB documents
Print documents from a USB ash drive.
Enable the USB port for printing
57
1. Insert the USB ash drive into the easy-access USB port.
NOTE: The port might be covered. For some printers, the cover ips open. For other printers, pull the
cover straight out to remove it.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
3. Select Print from USB Drive.
4. Select Choose, select the name of the document to print, and then select Select.
NOTE: The document might be in a folder. Open folders as necessary.
5. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the number of
copies from the keypad that opens. To close the keypad, select the Close button .
6. Select Print to print the document.
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)
Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port for wired USB printing. The port is located in the interface ports area and is
disabled by default.
Use one of the following methods to enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port. Once the port is enabled, install the
product software in order to print using this port.
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus
Use the control panel to enable the port.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Enable Device USB
3. Select the Enabled option.
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server
(network-connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to enable the port.
1. Find the printer IP address. On the printer control panel, select the Information button , and then select
the Network icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address exactly as it displays on the printer control
panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
58
Chapter 4 Print
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
3. Select the Security tab.
4. On the left side of the screen, select General Security.
5. Scroll down to the Hardware Ports and select the following check boxes:
a. Enable Device USB
b. Enable Host USB plug and play
6. Click Apply.
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers only)
59
60 Chapter 4 Print
Copy5
Make copies with the printer, learn how to copy a two-sided document, and locate additional copy tasks on the
web.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Make a copy
Copy a document or picture from the scanner glass or automatic document feeder.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
3. To select the number of copies, touch the box next to Copy, use the keypad to enter the number of copies,
and then touch the close keypad button .
4. Select Optimize Text/Picture to optimize for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos. Select
one of the predened options.
5. Set options marked with a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are summarized
in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
Copy
61
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-1 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, touch Copy to begin copying.
62
Chapter 5 Copy
Copy on both sides (duplex)
Copy or print on both sides of the paper.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
3. In the Options pane, select Original Side, and then select the option that describes the original document:
● Use Automatically detect to detect whether the original is printed on one or both sides of the page.
● Use 1-sided for originals that are printed on one side of the page.
● Use 2-sided (book-style) for originals that ip on the right/left edge of the page, like books. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output
ips on the short edge of the page.
● Use 2-sided (ip-style) for originals that ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like calendars. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output
ips on the long edge of the page.
4. Select Output Sides, and then select one of these options:
● Match original: The output will match the format of the original. For example, if the original is 1-sided,
the output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing and the original
is 1-sided, the output will be 2-sided book-style.
● 1-sided: The output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing, the
output will be 2-sided book-style.
● 2-sided (book-style): The output will ip on the right/left edge of the page, like a book. If the image is
portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output ips on the
short edge of the page.
● 2-sided (ip-style): The output will ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like a calendar. If the image
is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output ips on
the long edge of the page.
5. Set options marked with a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are summarized
in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-2
Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Copy on both sides (duplex) 63
Table 5-2 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, touch Start to begin copying.
Additional copy tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common copy tasks.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Instructions are available for copy tasks, such as the following:
64
Chapter 5 Copy
● Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
● Copy mixed-size documents
● Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
● Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
Additional copy tasks 65
66 Chapter 5 Copy
Scan6
Scan using the software, or scan directly to email, a USB ash drive, a network folder, or another destination.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Set up Scan to Email
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Introduction
To use this scan feature, the printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until
it has been congured. There are two methods for conguring Scan to Email, the Scan to Email Setup Wizard for
basic and Email Setup for advanced.
Use the following information to set up the Scan to Email feature.
Before you begin
To set up the Scan to Email feature, the printer must have an active network connection.
Administrators need the following information before beginning the conguration process.
● Administrative access to the printer
● DNS suix (e.g., companyname.com)
Scan
67
● SMTP server (e.g., smtp.mycompany.com)
NOTE: If you do not know the SMTP server name, SMTP port number, or authentication information,
contact the email/Internet service provider or system administrator for the information. SMTP server
names and port names are typically found by doing an Internet search. For example, use terms like "Gmail
smtp server name" or "Yahoo smtp server name" to search.
● SMTP server authentication requirements for outgoing email messages, including the user name and
password used for authentication, if applicable.
NOTE: Consult your email service provider's documentation for information on digital sending limits for your
email account. Some providers may temporarily lock your account if you exceed your sending limit.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two:
Congure the Network Identication settings
Congure advanced setting for network identication.
68
Chapter 6 Scan
NOTE: Conguring email setup on the Networking tab is an advanced process and might require the
assistance of a system administrator.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
NOTE: For conguring the network settings for use with Oice 365, Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use
Oice 365 Outlook (optional) on page 78
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings. A username/password might be required to access the
Network Identication tab of the EWS.
3. On the TCP/IP Settings dialog, click the Network Identication tab.
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suix area, verify that the DNS suix for the email
client being used is listed. DNS suixes have this format: companyname.com, gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name suix is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Step three:
Congure the Send to Email feature
The two options for conguring Send to Email are the Email Setup Wizard for basic conguration and Email Setup
for advanced conguration. Use the following options to congure the Send to Email feature:
Method one: Basic
conguration using the Email Setup Wizard
Perform basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard.
This option opens the Email Setup Wizard in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for basic conguration.
Step three:
Congure the Send to Email feature 69
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
3. In the Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards dialog, click the Email Setup link.
NOTE: If a message displays indicating that the Scan to Email feature is disabled, click Continue to proceed
with the conguration and enable the Scan to Email feature upon completion.
4. On the Congure Email Servers (SMTP) dialog, select one of the following options and complete the steps:
● Option one: Use a server already in use by Email.
Select Use a server already in use by Email, and then click Next.
● Option two: Search the network for the outgoing email server.
This option nds outgoing SMTP servers inside your rewall only.
a. Select Search network for outgoing email server, and then click Next.
b. Select the appropriate server from the Congure Email Server (SMTP) list, and then click Next.
c. Select the option that describes the server’s authentication requirements:
– Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.
-OR-
– Server requires authentication: From the drop-down list, select an authentication option:
○ Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then click
Next.
-OR-
70
Chapter 6 Scan
○ Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and then click
Next.
● Option three: Add the SMTP server.
a. Select Add SMTP server.
b. Enter the Server Name and Port Number, and then click Next.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
NOTE: If you are using a hosted SMTP service such as Gmail, verify the SMTP address, port
number, and SSL settings from the service provider’s website or other sources. Typically, for
Gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465, and the SSL should be enabled.
Please refer to online sources to conrm these server settings are current and valid at the time
of conguration.
c. Select the appropriate server authentication option:
– Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.
-OR-
– Server requires authentication: Select an option from the Server requires authentication
drop-down list:
○ Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then click
Next.
-OR-
○ Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and then click
Next.
5. On the Congure Email Settings dialog, enter the following information about the sender’s email address,
and then click Next.
NOTE: When setting up the From, Subject, and Message elds, if the User editable check box is unchecked,
users will not be able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an email.
Table 6-1
Send email settings
Option Description
From
(Required)
Select one of the following options from the From drop-down list:
● User’s address (sign-in required)
●
Default From: Enter a default email address and display name in the Default From Email
Address and Default Display Name elds
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default
email address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This
prevents users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
Subject
(Optional)
Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Method one: Basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard 71
Table 6-1 Send email settings (continued)
Option Description
Message
(Optional)
Create a custom message.
To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear the User editable check box for
Message.
6. In the Congure File Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences, and then click Next.
Table 6-2 Scan settings
Option Description
File Type Select the default le type for the scanned document:
● PDF
●
JPEG
● TIFF
● MTIFF
● XPS
● PDF/A
HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP printers or MFP printers that are connected to a digital send
software (DSS) server also support the following OCR le types:
● Text (OCR)
● Unicode Text (OCR)
● RTF (OCR)
● Searchable PDF (OCR)
● Searchable PDF/A (OCR)
● HTML (OCR)
● CSV (OCR)
Color/Black
Select the default color setting for the scanned document:
● Color
●
Black
● Black/Gray
● Automatically detect
Quality and File Size Select the default output quality for the scanned document:
● Low (small le)
●
Medium
● High (large le)
Resolution Select the default scan resolution for the scanned document:
● 75 dpi
●
150 dpi
72 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-2 Scan settings (continued)
Option Description
● 200 dpi
● 300 dpi
●
400 dpi
● 600 dpi
7. Review the Summary area, and then click Finish to complete the setup.
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup
Use the following steps for advanced
conguration using the E-mail Setup dialog in the EWS.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send, expand the Email Setup menu in the left
navigation pane, and then click Default Job Options.
The Default Job Options page displays the Basic Settings for Scan to Email setup. To access additional
settings, click the Advanced Settings button at the bottom of the page. To switch back to basic settings,
click the Basic Settings button.
NOTE: This procedure covers the steps for Basic Settings rst and then the steps for Advanced Settings.
Figure 6-1 Location of Advanced Settings button
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup 73
2. On the Default Job Options page, select the Enable Scan to Email check box. If this check box is not selected,
the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
3. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, complete the steps for one of the following options:
● Select one of the displayed servers.
● Click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
a. In the SMTP wizard, select one of the following options:
– Option one:I know my SMTP server address or host name: Enter the address of an SMTP
server, and then click Next
– Option two: If you do not know the address of the SMTP server, select Search network for
outgoing email server, and then click Next. Select the server, and then click Next.
NOTE: If an SMTP server was already created for another printer function, the Use a server
already in use by another function option displays. Select this option, and then congure it to be
used for the email function.
b. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, set the options to use,
and then click Next.
– Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes
(MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split emails if larger than
(MB).
– In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed. However, when using
the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol option, port 587 must be used.
– If you are using Google™ Gmail for email service, select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol check
box. Typically, for gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465, and the SSL
should be enabled. Refer to online sources to conrm these server settings are current and
valid at the time of conguration.
74
Chapter 6 Scan
c. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, select the option that describes the server’s
authentication requirements:
– Server does not require authentication, and then click Next.
– Server requires authentication
○ From the drop-down box, select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the
control panel, and then click Next.
○ From the drop-down box, select Always use these credentials, enter the Username and
Password, and then click Next.
NOTE: If using a signed-in user's credentials, set email to require sign in by the user on the
printer control panel. Deny device guest access to email by clearing the check box for email in the
Device Guest column in the Sign in and Permission Policies area on the Access Control dialog of
the Security tab. The icon in the check box changes from a check mark to a lock.
d. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP
server, and then click the Next button.
If the server requires authentication, a user name and password for sending automatic alerts and
reports from the printer will be required.
e. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send test email to: eld, and
then click Test.
f. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email
server set up.
4. In the Address and Message Field Control area, enter a From: setting and any of the other optional settings.
Table 6-3
Address and Message Field Control (Basic Settings)
Feature Description
User editable To use the Default From address and Default Display Name for all emails sent from this printer
(unless a user is signed in), clear the User editable check box.
When setting up the address elds, if the User editable check box is cleared, users will not be
able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an email. For send-to-me
functionality, clear the User editable check boxes for all of the address elds, including the From:,
To:, CC:, and BCC: elds, and then set that user's send email From: their own email address and To:
their own email address.
Default From: and Default
Display Name:
Provide an email address and name to use for the From: address for the email message.
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default email address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This prevents users
from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
Subject: Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Message: Create a custom message. To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear or do not
select the User editable check box for Message:.
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup 75
Table 6-4 Address and Message Field Control (Advanced Settings - optional)
Feature Description
Address Field Restrictions Specify whether users must select an email address from an address book or whether users are
allowed to enter in an email address manually.
CAUTION: If Users must select from address book is selected, and any of the address elds are
also set as User editable, changes to those editable elds also change the corresponding values in
the address book.
To prevent users from changing contacts in the Address Book at the printer control panel, go
to the Access Control page on the Security tab, and deny Device Guest access to address book
modications.
Allow invalid email address
formats
Select to allow an invalid email address format.
To: Provide a To (recipient) email address for emails.
CC: Provide a CC email address for emails.
BCC: Provide a BCC email address for emails.
5. In the File Settings area, set the default le settings preferences.
Table 6-5 File Settings (Basic Settings)
Feature Description
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they
show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the
le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Table 6-6 File settings (Advanced Settings - optional)
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate lename suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple
les.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
76 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-6 File settings (Advanced Settings - optional) (continued)
Feature Description
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied
as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be
prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to pressing
start.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number
of pages per le.
6. Click the Advanced Settings button to display the following settings:
● Signing and Encryption
● Notication (job notication)
● Scan Settings
7. In the Signing and Encryption area, set the signing and encryption preferences.
Table 6-7 Signing and Encryption settings
Feature Description
Signing Select whether to sign the email with a security certicate.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Hashing Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for signing the certicate.
Encryption Select whether to encrypt the email.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Encryption Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for encrypting the email.
Attribute for Recipient Public
Key
Enter which attribute to use to retrieve the recipient’s public key certicate from LDAP.
Use the recipient public
key certicate to verify the
recipient
Select this setting to use the recipient’s public key certicate to verify the recipient.
8. In the Notication area, select when users will receive notications about sent emails. The default setting is
using the signed in user's email address. If the recipient email address is blank, no notication is sent.
9. In the Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences.
Table 6-8
Scan Settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup 77
Table 6-8 Scan Settings (continued)
Feature Description
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or
millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
10. Review the selected options to verify that they are accurate, and then click Apply to complete the setup.
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Quick Sets are optional short-cut jobs that can be accessed on the main Home screen or within the Quick Sets
application at the printer. Use the following procedure to congure the Quick Sets.
1. In the Email Setup area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
● Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
● Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
3. If you selected Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
● Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
● Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
● Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then user presses
Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
4. Dene the following settings for the Quick Set: Address and Message Field Control, Signing and Encryption,
Notication, Scan Settings, File Settings.
5. Click Finish to save the Quick Set.
Step
ve: Set up Send to Email to use Oice 365 Outlook (optional)
Enable the printer to send an email with an Oice 365 Outlook account from the control panel.
Introduction
Microsoft Oice 365 Outlook is a cloud-based email system provided by Microsoft which uses Microsoft's Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to send or receive emails. Complete the following to enable the printer to
send an email with an Oice 365 Outlook account from the control panel.
NOTE: You must have an email address account with Oice 365 Outlook to congure the settings in the EWS.
78
Chapter 6 Scan
Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Oice 365 Outlook account
Congure the outgoing email server using the following procedure.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings.
3. In the TCP/IP Settings area, click the Network Identication tab.
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suix area, verify that the DNS suix for the email
client being used is listed. DNS suixes have this format: companyname.com, Gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name suix is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
7. On the left navigation pane, click Email Setup.
Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Oice 365 Outlook account 79
8. On the Email Setup page, select the Enable Scan to Email check box. If this check box is not available, the
feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
9. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
10. In the I know my SMTP server address or host name eld, type smtp.onoffice.com, and then click
Next.
11. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, in the Port Number eld, type
587.
NOTE: Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes (MB).
These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split emails if larger than (MB).
12. Select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol check box, and then click Next.
13. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, complete the following information:
a. Select Server requires authentication.
b. From the drop-down list, select Always use these credentials.
c. In the Username eld, type the Oice 365 Outlook email address.
d. In the Password eld, type the Oice 365 Outlook account password, and then click Next.
14. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP server, and
then click the Next button.
15. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test email to: eld, and then click
Test.
16. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email server setup.
For more information, go to Microsoft's Support page.
80
Chapter 6 Scan
Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up the Scan to Folder feature to scan documents directly to network folder.
Introduction
This section explains how to enable and congure the Scan to Network Folder function. The printer has a feature
that enables it to scan a document and save it to a network folder. To use this scan feature, the printer must be
connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it has been congured. There are two methods
for conguring Scan to Network Folder, the Save to Network Folder Setup Wizard for basic setup and Save to
Network Folder Setup for advanced setup.
Before you begin
Have the following items available before you set up the Scan to Network feature.
NOTE: To set up the Scan to Network Folder feature, the printer must have an active network connection.
Administrators need the following items before beginning the conguration process.
●
Administrative access to the printer.
● The fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) of the destination
folder OR the IP address of the server (e.g., \\16.88.20.20\scans).
NOTE: The use of the term "server" in this context refers to the computer where the shared folder resides.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Set up Scan to Network Folder 81
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up Scan to Network Folder using one of the following methods.
Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard
Use this option for basic conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the Scan to Network Folder
wizard.
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon , and
then touch the Network icon on the printer's control panel.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send tab. The Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick
Setup Wizards dialog opens.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
3. Click the Save to Network Folder Quick Set Wizard link.
4. On the Add or Remove a Save to Network Folder Quick Set dialog, click Add.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
NOTE: The Save to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a quick set.
However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel for
each scan job. A quick set is required to include Save to Network Folder metadata.
5. On the Add Folder Quick Set dialog, complete the following information:
a. In the Quick Set Title eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").
82
Chapter 6 Scan
b. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
c. Click Next.
6. On the Congure Destination Folder dialog, complete the following information:
a. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path where the scan will go.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the server.
Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via DHCP,
the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster because the
printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
b. From the Authentication Settings drop-down, select one of the following options:
● Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
●
Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be entered in
the corresponding elds, and the printer’s access to the folder must be veried by clicking Verify
Access.
c. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
TIP: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and then
click System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
d. Click Next.
7. On the Congure File Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then
click Next.
8. Review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
This option enables advanced conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) for the printer.
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon , and
then touch the Network icon on the printer's control panel.
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
83
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder Setup.
Step two: Congure the Scan to Network Folder settings
Use the following procedure to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin conguration.
1. On the Scan to Network Folder Setup page, select the Enable Scan to Network Folder check box. If this box
is not selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
2. In the Scan to Network Folder area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to open the Quick
Sets Setup dialog.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
NOTE: The Scan to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a Quick Set.
However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel for
each scan job. A Quick Set is required to include Scan to Network Folder metadata.
Complete all of the settings in the Quick Set Setup to fully congure the Scan to Network Folder feature.
Dialog one: Set the Quick Set name, description, and options for user interaction at the
control panel
Set the Quick Set details for user interaction at the printer's control panel.
Use the Set the button location for the Quick Set and options for user interaction at the control panel dialog to
congure where the Quick Set button will display on the printer control panel and to congure the level of user
interaction at the printer control panel.
1. In the Quick Set Name eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a folder").
2. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
3. From the Quick Set Start Option list, select one of the following options:
● Option one: Enter application, then user presses Start.
● Option two: Start instantly upon selection.
Select one of the following prompt options :
○ Prompt for original sides
○ Prompt for additional pages
○ Require Preview
NOTE: If Start instantly upon selection is selected, the destination folder must be entered in the next
step.
84
Chapter 6 Scan
4. Click Next.
Dialog two: Folder Settings
Use the Folder Settings dialog to congure the types of folders the printer sends scanned documents to and the
folder permissions.
There are two types of destination folders to select from:
● Shared folders or FTP folders
● Personal shared folders
There are two types of folder permissions to select from:
● Read and write access
● Write access only
Congure the destination folder for scanned documents
Select one of the following options to set up a destination folder.
Option 1: Congure the printer to save to a shared folder or FTP folder
To save scanned documents to a standard shared folder or an FTP folder, complete the following steps.
1. If it is not already selected, select Save to shared folders or FTP folders.
2. Click Add.... The Add Network Folder Path dialog opens.
3. On the Add Network Folder Path dialog, select one of the following options:
● Option one: Save to a standard shared network folder.
a. If it is not already selected, select Save to a standard shared network folder.
Dialog two: Folder Settings
85
b. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the
server. Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via
DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster
because the printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
c. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder
access to user.
d. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
e. From the Authentication Settings list, select one of the following options:
– Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
– Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be entered in
the corresponding elds.
f. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
NOTE: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and
then click
System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
NOTE: If a shared folder is set to be accessed by everyone, values for a workgroup name
(default is “Workgroup”), a user name, and password must be entered in the corresponding elds.
However, if the folder is within a particular user’s folders and not Public, the user name and
password of that user must be used.
NOTE: An IP address might be necessary instead of a computer name. Many home routers do
not handle computer names well, and there is no Domain Name Server (DNS). In this case, it is
best to set up a static IP address on the shared PC to alleviate the problem of DHCP assigning a
new IP address. On a typical home router, this is done by setting a static IP address that is on the
same subnet, but outside the DHCP address range.
g. Click OK.
● Option two: Save to an FTP Server.
86
Chapter 6 Scan
NOTE: If an FTP site is outside the rewall, a proxy server must be specied under the network
settings. These settings are located in the EWS Networking tab, under the Advanced options.
a. Select Save to an FTP Server.
b. In the FTP Server eld, type the FTP server name or IP address.
c. In the Port eld, type the port number.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
d. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
e. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
f. From the FTP Transfer Mode list, select one of the following options:
– Passive
– Active
g. In the Username eld, type the user name.
h. In the Password eld, type the password.
i. Click Verify Access to conrm the destination can be accessed.
j. Click OK.
Option 2: Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder
To save scanned documents to a personal shared folder, complete the following steps.
Option 2:
Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder 87
NOTE: This option is used in domain environments where the administrator congures a shared folder for
each user. If the Save to a personal shared folder feature is congured, users will be required to sign in at the
printer control panel using Windows credentials or LDAP authentication.
1. Select Save to a personal shared folder.
2. In the Retrieve the device user’s home folder using this attribute eld, type the user’s home folder in the
Microsoft Active Directory.
NOTE: Verify that the user knows where this home folder is located on the network.
3. To add a user name subfolder at the end of the folder path, select Create subfolder based on user name.
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder access to
user.
Select the destination folder permissions
Select one of the following options to set up destination folder permissions.
Option 1: Congure read and write access
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for read and write access, complete the following steps.
NOTE: Send only to folders with read and write access supports folder verication and job notication.
1. If it is not already selected, select Send only to folders with read and write access.
2. To require the printer to verify folder access before starting a scan job, select Verify folder access prior to job
start.
NOTE: Scan jobs can complete more quickly if Verify folder access prior to job start is not selected;
however, if the folder is unavailable, the scan job will fail.
3. Click Next.
Option 2: Congure write access only
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for write access only, complete the following steps.
NOTE: Allow sending to folders with write access only does not support folder verication or job notication.
NOTE: If this option is selected, the printer cannot increment the scan lename. It sends the same lename for
all scans.
Select a time-related lename prex or suix for the scan lename, so that each scan is saved as a unique le,
and does not overwrite a previous le. This lename is determined by the information in the File Settings dialog
in the Quick Set Wizard.
1. Select Allow sending to folders with write access only.
2. Click Next.
Dialog three:
Notication Settings
Use the Notication Settings dialog to congure when notications will be sent.
88
Chapter 6 Scan
▲ On the Notication Settings dialog, complete one of the following tasks:
● Option one: Do not notify.
a. Select Do not notify.
b. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
● Option two: Notify when job completes.
a. Select Notify when job completes.
b. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver Notication list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication Email
Address eld.
c. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
d. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
● Option three: Notify only if job fails.
a. Select Notify only if job fails.
b. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver Notication list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication Email
Address eld.
c. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
d. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
Dialog four: Scan Settings
Complete the scan settings as follows.
On the Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-9
Scan settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Dialog four: Scan Settings 89
Table 6-9 Scan settings (continued)
Feature Description
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
Dialog ve: File Settings
Complete the le settings as follows.
On the File Settings dialog, set the default le settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-10 File settings
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Metadata File Format Use the drop-down list to select the le format for metadata information.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
90 Chapter 6 Scan
Dialog six: Summary
On the Summary dialog, review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
Step three: Complete the conguration
Use the following steps to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder.
2. On the Scan to Network Folder page, review the selected settings, and then click Apply to complete the
setup.
Set up Scan to SharePoint
Use Scan to SharePoint to scan documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. This feature eliminates the
need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then manually upload
the les to the SharePoint site.
Introduction
Set up the Scan to SharePoint feature, and then scan documents directly to a SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or use the
OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
The feature is disabled by default. Enable Save to Sharepoint in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Before you begin
Before this procedure can be completed, the destination folder that the scanned les will be saved to must exist
on the SharePoint site, and write access must be enabled to the destination folder. Scan to SharePoint is disabled
by default.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Dialog six: Summary
91
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set
Follow the steps to enable the Scan to SharePoint feature and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set.
1. Using the top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
3. Select Enable Scan to SharePoint®, and then click Apply.
4. In the Scan to SharePoint area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to launch the Quick Set
Wizard.
5. Enter a Quick Set Name (for example, “Scan to SharePoint”) and a Quick Set Description.
6. Select a Quick Set Start Option to determine what occurs after selecting a Quick Set on the printer control
panel, and then click Next.
7. Use the following steps to add the path to the SharePoint folder:
a. Click Add on the SharePoint Destination Settings page to open the Add SharePoint Path page.
b. Open another browser window, navigate to the SharePoint folder to use, and then copy the folder path
for the SharePoint folder from that browser window.
c. Paste the SharePoint folder path into the SharePoint Path: eld.
d. By default, the printer overwrites an existing le that has the same le name as the new le. Clear
Overwrite existing les so that a new le with the same name as an existing le is given an updated
time/date stamp.
92
Chapter 6 Scan
e. Select an option from the Authentication Settings drop-down menu. Select whether it is necessary to
sign in to the SharePoint site with credentials, or store the credentials within the Quick Set.
NOTE: Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel is selected in the
Authentication Settings drop-down menu, the logged-in user must have permission to write to the
specied SharePoint site.
NOTE: For security purposes, the printer does not display credentials entered in the Quick Set
Wizard.
f. Click OK to complete the SharePoint path setup, and navigate back to the SharePoint Destination
Settings page.
8. Select Verify folder access prior to job start to ensure that the SharePoint folder specied as the destination
folder is accessible each time the Quick Set is used. If this option is not selected, jobs can be saved to
the SharePoint folder more quickly. However, if this option is not selected and the SharePoint folder is
inaccessible, the job will fail.
9. Click Next.
10. Set a Condition on Which to Notify on the Notication Settings page. This setting congures the Quick Set to
either not notify, or to send email messages or print a summary page if a job either completes successfully
or fails. Select one of the following options from the Condition on Which to Notify drop-down menu:
● Select Do not notify for the Quick Set to not perform any notication action when a job completes
successfully or fails.
● Select Notify when job completes to for the Quick Set to send a notication when a job completes
successfully.
● Select Notify only if job fails to for the Quick Set to send a notication only when a job fails.
Selecting either Notify when job completes or Notify only if job fails requires the Method Used to Deliver
Notication: to be set. Select from the following options:
● Email: Use this option to send an email when the selected notication condition occurs. This option
requires a valid email address in the Notication Email Address: eld.
NOTE: To use the email notication feature, rst congure the email feature on the printer.
● Print: Use this option to print the notication when the selected notication condition occurs.
NOTE: Select Include Thumbnail for either notication option to include a thumbnail image of the rst
page of the scanned page of the job.
11. Click Next.
12. Select options from the Scan Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table 6-12 Scan
settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 95.
13. Select options from the File Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table 6-13 File
settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 95.
14. Review the summary of settings. Click Finish to save the Quick Set or click Previous to edit the settings.
Scan a
le directly to a SharePoint site
Follow the steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
Scan a
le directly to a SharePoint site 93
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Touch the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le using either the on-screen
keyboard or the physical keyboard, and touch the Enter button .
5. Touch Options to view and congure settings for the document.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-11 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
94 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-11 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint
Review the settings and options available in the Quick Set Wizard when adding, editing, or copying a Scan to
SharePoint Quick Set.
Table 6-12 Scan settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
Table 6-13 File settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les to be saved.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les to be saved.
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint 95
Table 6-13 File settings for Scan to SharePoint (continued)
Feature Description
Duplicate lename suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
Set up Scan to USB Drive
Enable the Scan to USB feature, which allows you to scan directly to a USB ash drive.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a USB ash drive. The feature is not
available until it has been congured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
96
Chapter 6 Scan
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive
Enable Scan to USB Drive using the following steps.
1. Select the Security tab.
2. Scroll to Hardware Ports and make sure that Enable Host USB plug and play is enabled.
3. Select the Copy/Print tab for MFP models or the Print tab for SFP models.
4. Select the Enable Save to USB check box.
5. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
NOTE: Most devices ship with hard disk drives (HDDs) already installed. In some cases, additional storage
devices can be added via USB. Verify whether the Save to USB feature needs to be expanded to USB and hard
drive.
Step three:
Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Use the following steps to set up Quick Sets for Scan to USB Drive. Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be
accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick Sets application.
1. In the Scan to USB Drive area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
● Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
● Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive
97
3. If you clicked Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
a. Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
b. Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
c. Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then user presses
Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
4. Select a default location where scanned les are saved on USB storage devices inserted into the USB port
on the control panel, and then click Next. The default location options are:
● Save at root directory of the USB storage device.
● Create or place in this folder on the USB Storage Device — The path to the folder on the USB storage
device must be specied when using this le location option. A backslash \ must be used to separate
folder\subfolder names in the path.
5. Select an option from the Condition on Which to Notify: drop-down list, and then click Next.
This setting determines if, or how, users are notied when a Save To USB Quick Set job completes or fails.
The options for the Condition on Which to Notify: setting are:
● Do not notify
● Notify when job completes
● Notify only if job fails
6. Choose the Scan Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available scan settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to USB
Drive setup on page 98
7. Choose the File Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available le settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive
setup on page 98
8. Review the summary of settings, and then click Finish to save the Quick Set, or click Previous to edit the
settings.
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Review the default settings for Scan to USB Drive setup.
Table 6-14
Scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
98 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-14 Scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup (continued)
Feature Description
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
Default le settings for Save to USB setup
Review the options for Save to USB setup.
Table 6-15 File settings for Save to USB setup
Option name Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate lename suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
Default le settings for Save to USB setup 99
Scan to email
Scan a document directly to an email address or contact list. The scanned document is sent as an email message
attachment.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Scan to email
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to an email address or contact list.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Email.
NOTE: If prompted, type your user name and password.
3. Touch the To eld to open a keyboard.
NOTE: If you are signed in to the printer, your user name or other default information might appear in the
From eld. If so, you might not be able to change it.
4. Specify the recipients by using one of these methods:
● Use the keypad to enter the address in the To eld.
To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or select the Enter button
on the touchscreen keyboard after typing each address.
● Use a contact list as follows:
a. Select the Contacts button that is next to the To eld to open the Contacts screen.
b. Select the appropriate contact list.
c. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then select Add.
5. Complete the Subject, File Name, and Message elds by touching the eld and using the touchscreen
keyboard to enter information. Select the Close button whenever you need to close the keyboard.
6. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph, and High
Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
7. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if
prompted.
100
Chapter 6 Scan
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-16 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-17 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Scan to email 101
Table 6-17 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
9. When the document is ready, select Send to email it.
NOTE: The printer might prompt you to add the email address to the contact list.
Scan to job storage
Scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer. You
can retrieve the document from the printer and print it when needed.
NOTE: Before you can scan to a storage folder on the printer, your printer administrator or IT department must
use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and congure the settings.
Scan to job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer so that you can print
copies at any time.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Job Storage.
NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.
3. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder.
If the printer administrator has congured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these steps to
create a new folder:
102
Chapter 6 Scan
a. Select the New Folder icon .
b. Select the New Folder eld, type the folder name, and then select OK.
4. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.
5. Touch the Job Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
6. To make the job private, select the PIN button , enter a four-digit PIN in the PIN eld, and then close the
touchscreen keypad.
7. To congure settings, such as Sides and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left corner, and
then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each setting if prompted.
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-18 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-19
Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Scan to job storage on the printer 103
Table 6-19 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
9. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the storage folder.
Print from job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to print a scanned document that is in a job storage folder on the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, select the Print icon,
and then select Print from Job Storage.
2. Under Stored Jobs to Print, select Choose, select the folder in which the document is saved, select the
document, and then select Select.
3. If the document is private, enter the four-digit PIN in the Password eld, and then select OK.
4. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the number of
copies from the keypad that opens. Select the Close button to close the keypad.
5. Select Print to print the document.
Scan to network folder
Scan a document and save it to a folder on the network.
104
Chapter 6 Scan
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it in a shared folder on the network.
Scan to network folder
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a network folder.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Network Folder.
3. Specify a folder destination. Folder options must rst be congured by the printer administrator.
● To select a folder location that the administrator already set up, select Load under Quick Sets and
Defaults, select the folder, and then select Load.
● To specify a new folder location, touch the Folder Paths eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the
path to the folder, and then select the Enter button . Enter user credentials if prompted and then
select Save to save the path.
NOTE: Use this format for the path: \\server\folder, where “server” is the name of the server
that hosts the shared folder, and “folder” is the name of the shared folder. If the folder is nested inside
other folders, complete all necessary segments of the path to reach the folder. For example:
\\server\folder\folder
NOTE: The Folder Paths eld might have a pre-dened path, and it might not be editable. In this
situation, the administrator has congured this folder for common access.
4. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each
setting if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-20
Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Introduction 105
Table 6-20 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-21 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
106 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-21 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save the le to the network folder.
Scan to SharePoint
Scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
Introduction
If you have a workow-equipped printer, you can scan a document and send it to a SharePoint site. This feature
eliminates the need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then
manually upload the les to the SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or use the
OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
NOTE: Before you can scan to SharePoint, your printer administrator or IT department must use the HP
Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and set it up.
Scan to SharePoint
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Select the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le, and then select the enter
button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the
lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if prompted.
Scan to SharePoint
107
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-22 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-23 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
108 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-23 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
Scan to USB drive
Scan a document directly to a USB drive.
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it to a USB ash drive.
Scan to USB drive
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a USB drive.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. Insert the USB drive into the USB port near the printer control panel.
3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to USB Drive.
4. Select the USB drive under Destination, and then select the save location (either the root of the USB drive or
an existing folder).
5. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
6. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if
prompted.
Scan to USB drive
109
7. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-24 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-25 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
110 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-25 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
8. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the USB drive.
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
HP JetAdvantage solutions are
workow and printing solutions that are easy to use, and both network- and
cloud-based. HP JetAdvantage solutions are designed to help businesses of all types, including healthcare,
nancial services, manufacturing, and public sector, manage a eet of printers and scanners.
HP JetAdvantage Solutions include:
● HP JetAdvantage Security solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Management solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Workow solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Mobile Printing solutions
For more information about HP JetAdvantage business workow and printing solutions, go to
www.hp.com/go/PrintSolutions.
Additional scan tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common scan tasks.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Instructions are available for performing specic scan tasks, such as the following:
● Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
● Send a scanned document to a folder in the printer memory
● Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
● Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
111
112 Chapter 6 Scan
Fax7
Congure the fax features, and send and receive faxes using the printer.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Set up fax
Set up the fax features for the printer.
Introduction
This information applies to fax and Flow models, or to other printers when an optional analog fax accessory has
been installed. Before continuing, connect the printer to a phone line (for analog fax) or to an Internet or network
fax service.
Set up fax by using the printer control panel
Congure the fax features using the control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Internal Fax Modem Setup
NOTE: If the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or Internet
fax might be enabled. When LAN or Internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and
the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax,
or Internet fax, can be enabled at a time. To use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the HP
Embedded Web Server to disable LAN fax.
Fax
113
3. Select the location from the list on the right side of the screen, and then select Next.
4. Touch the Company Name text eld, and use the keypad to type the company name.
5. Touch the Fax Number text eld, and use the keypad to type the sending fax number. Select Next.
6. Verify that the date and time settings are correct. Make changes as necessary, and then select Next.
7. If a dialing prex is required for sending faxes, touch the Dialing Prex text eld, and use the keypad to enter
the number.
8. Review all the information on the left pane, and then select Finish to complete the fax setup.
Change fax congurations
Change or update fax settings.
NOTE: The settings congured using the control panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded Web
Server.
Fax dialing settings
Use the following steps to change the fax dialing settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. Fax Dialing Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-1
Fax dialing settings
Menu item Description
Redial on Error The Redial on Error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed
when an error occurs during a fax transmission.
Redial on No Answer The Redial on No Answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory redials
if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1 (used in
the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the location setting. The interval between retries is set
by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial on Busy The Redial on Busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax accessory
redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between retries is set by the
Redial Interval setting.
Redial Interval The Redial Interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the
number dialed is busy or not answering, or if an error occurs.
NOTE: You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the
Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer settings are set to o. This occurs when the
fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the connection.
As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs three automatic redial
attempts regardless of the redial settings. During this redial operation, a message
displays on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in progress.
114 Chapter 7 Fax
Table 7-1 Fax dialing settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax Send Speed The Fax Send Speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per second) of
the Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
● Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
● Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Line Monitor Volume Use the Line Monitor Volume setting to control the printer's dialing volume level when
sending faxes.
Dialing Mode The Dialing Mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-tone
phones) or pulse (rotary-dial phones).
Dialing Prex The Dialing Prex setting allows you to enter a prex number (such as a "9" to access
an outside line) when dialing. This prex number is automatically added to all phone
numbers when dialed.
Detect Dial Tone The Detect Dial Tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone before
sending a fax.
General fax send settings
Use the following steps to change the fax send settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-2
Fax send settings
Menu item Description
Fax Number Conrmation When the Fax Number Conrmation feature is enabled, the fax number must be
entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The feature is disabled by default.
PC Fax Send Use the PC Fax Send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by
default.
Error Correction Mode Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is
sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the transmission
and the Error Correction Mode setting is on, the fax accessory can request that the
error portion of the fax be sent again.
The Error Correction Mode feature is enabled by default. You should turn it o only if
you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing to accept the
errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the image. Turning o
the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one
from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
NOTE: Some VoIP providers might suggest turning o the Error Correction Mode
setting. However, this is not usually necessary.
General fax send settings 115
Table 7-2 Fax send settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax Header Use the Fax Header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top, and
content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the previous header.
Fax receive settings
Use the following steps to change the fax receive settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Receive Setup
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-3 Fax receive settings
Menu item Description
Receive Mode The Receive Mode setting determines how the fax accessory receives fax jobs. Select
one of the following options:
● Automatic
● TAM
● Fax/Tel
● Manual
Rings to Answer The Rings to Answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings before
the call is answered by the fax accessory.
NOTE: The default range for the available options for the Rings to Answer setting is
location-specic. The range of possible Rings to Answer options is limited by location.
If the fax accessory is not answering, and the Rings to Answer setting is 1, try
increasing it to 2.
Ring Volume The Ring Volume setting allows you to adjust the ringer volume.
Fax Receive Speed Touch the Fax Receive Speed drop-down menu and select one of the following options:
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●
Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
● Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Extension Phone This setting allows you use a separate telephone in conjunction with the fax functions.
Allow Reprinting This setting allows you to reprint received faxes.
Receive to PC This setting allows you to receive faxes directly to your computer.
Fax Polling This setting allows you to enable or disable the fax polling function.
116 Chapter 7 Fax
Table 7-3 Fax receive settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax/Tel Ring Time This setting determines the number of times the phone rings before the fax/tel mode
initiates.
Send a fax
Use the following steps to send a fax from the printer.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon. You might be prompted to type a user name and password.
3. Specify the recipients using one of these methods:
● Use the keypad to enter the recipient or recipients.
Touch the Fax Recipients text eld, and then use the keypad to enter the fax number. To send to
multiple fax numbers, separate the numbers with a semicolon, or select the Enter button on the
touchscreen keyboard after typing each number.
● Use a contact list as follows:
a. Select the Contacts button that is next to the Fax Recipients eld to open the Contacts screen.
b. Select the appropriate contact list.
c. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then select Add.
4. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph, and High
Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
5. To congure settings, such as Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left
corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 7-4
Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Send a fax 117
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 7-5 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to send the fax.
118
Chapter 7 Fax
Create a fax printing schedule
Faxes print automatically upon receipt, but they can also be stored and printed on a schedule that you determine.
After you create the schedule, you can enable or disable the schedule as needed.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Printing Schedule
3. Under Incoming Fax Options, select Use Schedule.
4. Select New Event.
5. Select an option under Event Type.
● Begin Printing
● Begin Storing
6. Choose a time and the day. You can select multiple days.
7. Select Save. To add another event, repeat steps 4 – 6.
8. Select Done to enable the fax printing schedule.
Block incoming faxes
Use the fax block list setting to create a list of blocked phone numbers. When a fax is received from a blocked
phone number, the fax is not printed and is immediately deleted from memory.
Create a list of blocked fax numbers
Use the following steps to create the list of fax numbers to block.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Blocked Fax Numbers
3. Use one of the following options to add a number to the list:
● Select Add Last Sender.
● Select the New Fax Number eld, type the number on the keypad that appears, and then select the
Enter button . To add additional numbers, type the number and select the Enter button .
Create a fax printing schedule
119
4. Select Done.
Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers
Use the following steps to remove numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Blocked Fax Numbers
3. Select one or more existing fax numbers in the list, or select Select All if youwant to remove all the
numbers.
4.
Select the Trash button , and then select Delete on the conrmation prompt.
Additional fax tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common fax tasks.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Instructions are available for fax tasks, such as the following:
● Create and manage fax speed dial lists
● Congure fax billing codes
● Use a fax printing schedule
● Block incoming faxes
● Fax archiving and forwarding
120 Chapter 7 Fax
Manage the printer8
Utilize management tools, congure security and energy-conservation settings, and manage rmware updates
for the printer.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Advanced
conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage advanced printing functions.
Introduction
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from a computer instead of the printer control
panel.
● View printer status information
● Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones
● View and change tray congurations
● View and change the printer control-panel menu conguration
● View and print internal pages
● Receive notication of printer and supplies events
● View and change network conguration
The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The HP Embedded
Web Server does not support IPX-based printer connections. Internet access is not needed to open and use the
HP Embedded Web Server.
Manage the printer
121
When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.
NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network rewall.
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Use the following steps to open the EWS.
1.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:
Windows® 7
● Internet Explorer (version 8.x or greater)
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
Windows® 8 or greater
● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
macOS
● Safari (version 5.x or greater)
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
Linux
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
HP Embedded Web Server features
Learn about the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features available on each tab.
122
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Figure 8-1 EWS Tabs
NOTE: Copy/Print, Scan/Digital Send, and Fax tabs only appear for multi-function printers (MFPs). A Print tab
appears for single-function printers (SFPs).
Information
tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Information tab.
Table 8-1
HP Embedded Web Server Information tab
Menu Description
Device Status Shows the printer status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The page
also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click
the Change Settings link.
Job Log Provides a list of the jobs that have been processed.
Conguration Page Shows the information found on the conguration page.
Supplies Status Page Shows the status of the supplies for the printer.
Event Log Page Shows a list of all printer events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the Other
Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of dynamic web
pages that help solve problems. These pages also show additional services available for the
printer.
Usage Page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size, type,
and paper print path.
Device Information Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To customize these
entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.
Control Panel Snapshot Shows an image of the current screen on the control panel display.
Remote Control-Panel Provides a way to troubleshoot or manage the printer from a browser window on a desktop
or laptop.
Print Allows the user to send a print-ready le to the printer to be printed.
Printable Reports and Pages Lists the internal reports and pages for the printer. Select one or more items to print.
Information tab 123
Table 8-1 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab (continued)
Menu Description
Open Source Licenses Shows a summary of the licenses for open source software programs that can be used with
the printer.
General tab
Refer to the table for settings in the General tab.
Table 8-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab
Menu Description
Control Panel Customization Reorder, show, or hide features on the control-panel display.
Change the default display language and keyboard layouts.
Quick Sets Congure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on the printer
control panel.
Alerts Set up email alerts for various printer and supplies events.
Control Panel Settings App Shows the Settings app options that are available on the printer control panel.
General Settings Congure how the printer recovers from jams and other general printer settings.
AutoSend Congure the printer to send automated emails regarding printer conguration and
supplies to specic email addresses.
Edit Other Links Add or customize a link to another website. This link displays in the footer area on all
HP Embedded Web Server pages.
Ordering Information Enter information about ordering replacement toner cartridges. This information displays
on the supplies status page.
Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary contact
who will receive information about the printer.
Language Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Date/Time Settings Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.
Energy Settings Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the printer. Set a dierent schedule
for each day of the week and for holidays.
Set which interactions with the printer cause it to wake from sleep mode.
Back up and Restore Create a backup le that contains printer and user data. If necessary, use this le to restore
data to the printer.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to the factory defaults.
Solution Installer Install or remove third-party software packages that extend or modify the functionality of
the printer.
Job Statistics Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-statistics services, or enables local
serverless device job accounting.
Quota Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-quota services, or enables local
device quota service.
124 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Other Links list
Congure which links display in the footer of the HP Embedded Web Server by using the Edit Other Links menu
on the General tab.
NOTE: The following are the default links.
Table 8-3 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list
Menu Description
HP Instant Support Connect to the HP website to nd solutions to printer problems.
Shop for Supplies Connect to the HP website for information on purchasing original HP supplies, such as
cartridges and paper.
Product Support Connect to the support site for the printer to search for help on various topics.
Copy/Print tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Copy/Print tab.
Table 8-4 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab
Menu Description
Print from USB Drive Settings Enable or disable the Print from USB Drive menu on the control panel.
Manage Stored Jobs Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the printer memory.
Congure job-storage options.
Default Print Options Congure the default options for print jobs.
Restrict Color
(Color printers only)
Permit or restrict color printing and copying.
Specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specic software
programs.
PCL and PostScript Settings Adjust the PCL and PostScript settings for all print jobs, including copy jobs and received
faxes.
Print Quality Congure the print quality settings, including color adjustment, image registration, and
allowed paper types.
Copy Settings Congure the default options and Quick Sets for copy jobs.
NOTE: If job-specic copy setting options are not set from the control panel at the start of
a job, the default settings will be used for the job.
Expert Copy Enable or disable Expert Copy and set the initial copy view.
The Expert Copy feature is available only on some HP MFPs with larger control panels, and
is available in FutureSmart 4 rmware 24.7.3 release or later.
Manage Trays Congure settings for paper trays.
Manage Stapler/Stacker Congure settings for the stapler/stacker for printers that have this feature.
Scan/Digital Send tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Scan/Digital Send tab.
Other Links list
125
Table 8-5 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab
Menu Description
Email Setup Congure the default email settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
● Settings for Email Quick Sets jobs
● Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line
● Settings for digital signatures and encryption
● Settings for email notications
● Default scan settings for email jobs
● Default le settings for email jobs
Scan to Network Folder Congure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder
● Settings for notications
● Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder
● Default le settings for jobs saved in a network folder
Scan to SharePoint® Congure the SharePoint settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
● Default settings for jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
Scan to USB Drive Congure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB ash drive
● Settings for notications
● Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
● Default le settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
Contacts Manage contacts, including the following:
● Add email addresses into the printer one at a time.
● Import a large list of frequently-used email addresses on to the printer all at once,
rather than adding them one at a time.
● Export contacts from the printer into a .CSV le on the computer to use as a data
backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
● Edit email addresses that have already been saved in the printer.
Preferences Manage general scanning settings.
Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick
Setup Wizards
Congure the printer to send scanned images as email attachments.
Congure the printer to save scanned images to network-folder Quick Sets. Quick Sets
provide easy access to les saved on the network.
Digital Sending Software Setup Congure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.
126 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Fax tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Fax tab.
Table 8-6 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab
Menu Description
Fax Send Setup Congure settings for sending faxes, including the following:
● Default settings for outgoing faxes
● Settings for fax Quick Sets jobs
● Settings for notications
● Default setting for sending faxes using the internal fax modem
● Settings for using a LAN fax service
● Settings for using an Internet fax service
Fax Speed Dials Manage speed dials, including the following:
● Import .CSV les containing email addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that
they can be accessed on this printer.
● Export email, fax, or user records from the printer into a le on the computer to use as
a data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
Fax Receive Setup Congure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing schedule.
Fax Archive and Forwarding Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and congure basic settings for each:
● Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to an
email address, a network folder, or an FTP server.
● Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a dierent fax device.
Fax Activity Log Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.
Supplies tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Supplies tab.
Table 8-7
HP Embedded Web Server Supplies tab
Menu Description
Manage Supplies Congure how the printer reacts when supplies reach a Very Low state.
Troubleshooting tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Troubleshooting tab.
Table 8-8
HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab
Menu Description
General Troubleshooting Use the following options as appropriate:
● Reports and Tests area: Select and print several types of reports and tests. Some
reports can be viewed in the EWS by clicking the View button.
Fax tab 127
Table 8-8 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab (continued)
Menu Description
● Fax Tools area: Congure settings for fax troubleshooting. (MFP and Digital Sender
products with HP analog fax accessory only)
● OXPd Troubleshooting area: Enable or disable the Allow a Non-Secure Connection for
Web Services option
● Auto Recovery area: Enable or disable the Enable Auto Recovery option, which allows
the printer to auto recover from errors that might require the power to be turned o
and on (for example, a 49 error).
Online Help Link to HP cloud-based online help to assist in troubleshooting printing issues.
Diagnostic Data
NOTE: This item is available only if an
administrator password is set from the
Security tab.
Export printer information to a le that can be useful for HP technical support to use for
detailed problem analysis.
Calibration/Cleaning
(Color LaserJet printers only)
Enable the automatic cleaning feature, create and print the cleaning page, and select an
option to calibrate the printer immediately.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to factory defaults.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Security tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Security tab.
Table 8-9
HP Embedded Web Server Security tab
Menu Description
General Security Settings for general security, including the following:
● Congure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on the
printer.
● Set a custom device Service Access Code.
● Set PJL password for processing PJL commands.
● Set le system access and rmware upgrade security.
● Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB connectivity port
on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.
● View the status of all security settings.
Account Policy Enable administrator account settings.
Access Control Congure access to printer functions for specic individuals or groups, and select the
method individuals use to sign in to the printer.
Protect Stored Data Congure and manage the internal storage for the printer.
Congure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer internal storage.
Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certicates that allow devices to
use this product.
Certicate Management Install and manage security certicates for access to the printer and the network.
128 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Table 8-9 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)
Menu Description
Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to which the
printer can send messages.
Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from dierent domains. If no
sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.
Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system parameters.
HP Web Services tab
Use the HP Web Services tab to congure and enable HP Web Services for this printer. It is necessary to Enable
HP Web Services to use the HP ePrint feature.
Table 8-10 HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab
Menu Description
Web Services Setup Connect this printer to HP Connected on the web by enabling HP Web Services.
Web Proxy Congure a proxy server if there are issues enabling HP Web Services or connecting the
printer to the Internet.
HP JetAdvantage Access solutions that extend the capabilities of the printer
Smart Cloud Print Enable Smart Cloud Print, which allows access to web-based apps that extend the
capabilities of the printer.
Networking tab
Use the Networking tab to congure and secure network settings for the printer when it is connected to an
IP-based network. This tab does not display if the printer is connected to other types of networks.
Table 8-11
HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Conguration settings
Menu Description
Wireless Station Congure the initial wireless settings.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
Wi-Fi Direct Congure Wi-Fi Direct settings for printers that include embedded Wi-Fi Direct Print and NFC
printing or that have a wireless accessory installed.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
TCP/IP Settings Congure TCP/IP settings for IPv4 and IPv6 networks.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
Network Settings Congure IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC, and SNMP settings, depending on the print server
model.
Other Settings Congure general printing protocols and services supported by the print server. The
available options depend on the print server model, but can include rmware update, LPD
queues, USB settings, support information, and refresh rate.
AirPrint Enable, set up, or disable network printing from Apple-supported printers.
HP Web Services tab 129
Table 8-11 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Conguration settings (continued)
Menu Description
Select Language Change the language displayed by the HP Embedded Web Server. This page displays if
the web pages support multiple languages. Optionally, select supported languages through
language-preference settings in the browser.
Select Location Select a country/region for the printer.
Table 8-12 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Google Cloud Print settings
Menu Description
Setup Set up Google Cloud Print options.
Web Proxy Congure proxy settings.
Table 8-13 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings
Menu Description
Settings View and restore current security settings to factory-default values.
Congure security settings using the Security Conguration Wizard.
NOTE: Do not use the Security Conguration Wizard to congure security settings if using
network-management applications, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
Authorization Control conguration management and use of this printer, including limiting host access to
this printer through an Access Control List (ACL) (for selected print servers on IPv4 networks
only).
Secure Communication Congure Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol and encryption options.
Mgmt. Protocols Congure and manage security protocols for this printer, including the following:
● Set the security management level for the HP Embedded Web Server, and control
traic over HTTP and HTTPS.
● Congure the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) operation. Enable or
disable the SNMP v1/v2c or SNMP v3 agents on the print server.
● Control access through protocols that may not be secure, such as printing protocols,
print services, discovery protocols, name resolution services, and conguration-
management protocols.
802.1X Authentication Congure 802.1X authentication settings on the Jetdirect print server as required for
client authentication on the network, and reset the 802.1X authentication settings to
factory-default values.
CAUTION: When changing the 802.1X authentication settings; the printer might lose its
connection. To reconnect, it might be necessary to reset the print server to a factory-default
state and reinstall the printer.
IPsec/Firewall View or congure a Firewall policy or an IPsec/Firewall policy.
Announcement Agent Enable or disable the HP Device Announcement Agent, set the conguration server, and
congure mutual authentication using certicates.
130 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Table 8-14 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Diagnostics settings
Menu Description
Network Statistics Display network statistics that are collected and stored on the HP Jetdirect print server.
Protocol Info View a list of network-conguration settings on the HP Jetdirect print server for each
protocol.
Conguration Page View the HP Jetdirect conguration page, which contains status and conguration
information.
Congure IP network settings
Use the EWS to congure the printer network settings.
Printer sharing disclaimer
Review the following disclaimer.
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems and
not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.
View or change network settings
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to view or change IP conguration settings.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. Change settings as needed.
Rename the printer on a network
To rename the printer on a network so that it can be uniquely identied, use the HP Embedded Web Server.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
Congure
IP network settings 131
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE:
If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the Device Information page, the default printer name is in the Device Name eld. You can change this
name to uniquely identify this printer.
NOTE: Completing the other elds on this page is optional.
4. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. TCP/IP
d. IPV 4 Settings
e. Cong Method
3. Select the Manual option, and then touch the Save button.
4. Open the Manual Settings menu.
5. Touch the IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Default Gateway option.
6. Touch the rst eld to open a keypad. Enter the correct digits for the eld, and then touch the OK button.
Repeat the process for each eld, and then touch the Save button.
Manually
congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv6 address.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. To enable manual conguration, open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
132
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
c. TCP/IP
d. IPV6 Settings
3. Select Enable, and then select On.
4. Select the Enable Manual Settings option, and then touch the Done button.
5. To congure the address, open the Address menu, and then touch the eld to open a keypad.
6. Use the keypad to enter the address, and then touch the OK button.
7. Touch Save.
Link speed and duplex settings
Use the following steps to make changes to link speed and duplex settings.
NOTE: This information applies only to Ethernet networks. It does not apply to wireless networks.
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network hub. For most situations,
leave the printer in automatic mode. Incorrect changes to the link speed and duplex settings might prevent the
printer from communicating with other network devices. To make changes, use the printer control panel.
NOTE: The printer setting must match the setting for the network device (a network hub, switch, gateway,
router, or computer).
NOTE: Making changes to these settings causes the printer to turn o and then on. Make changes only when
the printer is idle.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. Link Speed
3. Select one of the following options:
● Auto: The print server automatically congures itself for the highest link speed and communication
mode allowed on the network.
● 10T Half: 10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation
● 10T Full: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
● 10T Auto: 10 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
● 100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
● 100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
● 100TX Auto: 100 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
● 1000T Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation
Link speed and duplex settings
133
4. Touch the Save button. The printer turns o and then on.
Printer security features
Restrict who has access to conguration settings, secure data, and prevent access to valuable hardware
components.
Introduction
The printer includes several security features to restrict who has access to conguration settings, to secure data,
and to prevent access to valuable hardware components.
Security statements
Review this important security statement.
The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the printer secure,
protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the printer.
Assign an administrator password
Assign an administrator password for access to the printer and the HP Embedded Web Server so that
unauthorized users cannot change the printer settings.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password
Use the following steps to set a password for the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Open the General Security menu.
4. In the area labeled Set the Local Administrator Password, enter the name to associate with the password in
the Username eld.
5. Enter the password in the New Password eld, and then enter it again in the Verify Password eld.
NOTE: To change an existing password, rst enter the existing password in the Old Password eld.
134
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
6. Click the Apply button.
IMPORTANT: Make note of the password and store it in a safe place. The administrator password cannot
be recovered. If the administrator password is lost or forgotten, contact HP Support for the assistance
required to completely reset the printer.
Click here to contact HP Support about resetting the printer password.
Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel
Use the following steps to sign into the control panel.
Some features on the printer control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them. When
a feature is secured, the printer prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in without waiting
for a prompt by selecting Sign In from the printer control panel.
Typically, the credentials for signing in to the printer are the same as for signing in to the network. Consult the
network administrator for this printer if you have questions about which credentials to use.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Sign In.
2. Follow the prompts to enter the credentials.
NOTE: To maintain security for the printer, select Sign Out when you have nished using the printer.
IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network
traic to and from the printer. IPsec
provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.
For printers that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can congure IPsec by
using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks
The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive data without impacting
printer performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile
time-saving features and robust functionality.
Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to congure the disk.
Lock the formatter
The formatter has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.
Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.
Energy-conservation settings
Learn about the energy-conservation settings that are available for the printer.
Set the sleep timer and
congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings aect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time, how quickly the printer enters
sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up from sleep mode.
Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel
135
To congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter times for both the Sleep after
Inactivity and Auto O after sleep settings.
NOTE: HP does not recommend using deep sleep settings if you have Security Solutions installed. In some
situations, the printer does not wake from deep sleep. For additional information, contact your HP
representative.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Settings
3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is inactive before it enters sleep
mode. Enter the appropriate time period.
4. Select Auto O after sleep to put the printer into a deeper power save mode after a period of sleep. Enter
the appropriate time period.
NOTE: By default, the printer will wake from Auto O in response to any activity other than USB or Wi-Fi.
For greater energy settings, you can set it to wake only to the power button by selecting Shut down (wake
on power button only).
5. Select Done to save the settings.
Set the sleep schedule
Use the Sleep Schedule feature to congure the printer to automatically wake or go into Sleep mode at specic
times on specic days of the week.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Schedule
3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Event or Sleep Event.
4. For a wake or sleep event, congure the time and the days of the week for the event. Select Save to save
the setting.
Set the idle settings
This setting aects energy use while the product is idle, not while in Sleep Mode. Start faster results in a
quicker rst-page-out time, but uses more power. Save energy conserves power, but could result in a slower
rst-page-out time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Settings menu.
136
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Idle Settings
3. Adjust the slider, and then select Done to save the setting.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for
eiciently managing a wide variety of networked
HP products, including printers, multifunction printers, and digital senders. This single solution allows you
to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot, and secure your printing and imaging environment —
ultimately increasing business productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin upgrades are periodically made available to provide support for specic product features. Go to
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin for more information.
Software and
rmware updates
HP regularly updates features that are available in the printer rmware. To take advantage of the most current
features, update the printer rmware.
Download the most recent rmware update le from the web:
Go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP. Click Software, Drivers and Firmware.
HP Web Jetadmin 137
138 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Solve problems9
Troubleshoot problems with the printer. Locate additional resources for help and technical support.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM480MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
●
Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Control panel help system
The printer has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the
Help button on the control panel.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specic topics. You can browse
through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
Some Help screens include animations that show specic procedures, such as clearing paper jams.
If the printer alerts of an error or warning, touch the Help button to open a message that describes the
problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
Reset factory settings
Resetting the printer settings to the factory-set defaults can help resolve problems.
Solve problems
139
Introduction
Use one of the following methods to reset the printer settings to the original settings from the factory.
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to restore the settings to their original values.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Reset Factory Settings
3. Select Reset.
A verication message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
4. Select Reset to complete the process.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network
connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to reset the printer settings to the original settings.
1. On the printer control panel, select the Information button , and then select the Network icon to
display the IP address or host name.
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the left side of the screen, click Reset Factory Settings.
4. Click the Reset button.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on
the printer control panel or EWS
Review the possible solutions to this issue.
Cartridge is low: The printer indicates when a toner cartridge level is low. Actual toner cartridge life remaining
may vary. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The toner
cartridge does not need to be replaced now.
Continue printing with the current cartridge until redistributing the toner no longer yields acceptable print quality.
To redistribute the toner, remove the toner cartridge from the printer and gently rock the cartridge back and forth
end to end. Reinsert the toner cartridge into the printer and close the cover.
140
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Cartridge is very low: The printer indicates when the toner cartridge level is very low. Actual toner cartridge life
remaining may vary. To extend the life of the toner, gently rock the cartridges back and forth end to end. Consider
having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The toner cartridge does not
need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
HP’s Premium Protection Warranty expires when a message indicating that HP's Premium Protection Warranty on
this supply has ended appears on the Supplies Status Page or the EWS.
Change the “Very Low” settings
You can change the way the printer reacts when supplies reach the Very Low state. You do not have to
re-establish these settings when you install a new cartridge.
Change the “Very Low” settings at the control panel
Change the setting at the printer control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Very Low Behavior
c. Black Cartridge or Color Cartridges
3. Select one of the following options:
● Select the Stop option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge reaches the Very Low
threshold.
● Select the Prompt to continue option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge reaches the
Very Low threshold. You can acknowledge the prompt or replace the cartridge to resume printing.
● Select the Continue option to set the printer to alert you that the cartridge is very low, and to continue
printing beyond the Very Low setting without interaction. This can result in unsatisfactory print quality.
Change the “Very Low” settings
141
For printers with fax capability
When the printer is set to the Stop or Prompt to continue option, there is some risk that faxes will not print when
the printer resumes printing. This can occur if the printer has received more faxes than the memory can hold
while the printer is waiting.
The printer can print faxes without interruption when it passes the Very Low threshold if you select the Continue
option for the cartridge, but print quality might degrade.
Order supplies
Order supplies and paper for your HP printer.
Table 9-1 Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL eld. The EWS contains a link to the HP
website, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
Use this information if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is picking up multiple sheets of paper at
one time.
Introduction
The following solutions can help solve problems if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is picking up
multiple sheets of paper at one time. Either of these situations can result in paper jams.
The printer does not pick up paper
If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions:
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper. Verify that no torn remnants of paper remain
inside the printer.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the marking on
the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or
markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers. Most
HP printers have markings similar to these.
142
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Figure 9-1 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-2 Size markings for cassette trays
5. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer and that paper is being stored in
unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep paper dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it might
have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper from the stack.
The printer does not pick up paper
143
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If this
happens, remove the paper from the tray, and ex the stack by holding it at each end and bringing the
ends up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to reverse the U shape. Next, hold each side of
the stack of paper and repeat this process. This process releases individual sheets without introducing static
electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a table before returning it to the tray.
Figure 9-3 Technique for exing the paper stack
1
2
1
2
A4
A3
6. Check the printer control panel to see if it is displaying a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and
continue.
7. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with
warm water. Use distilled water, if it is available.
CAUTION: Do not spray water directly onto the printer. Instead, spray water on the cloth or dab the cloth
in water and wring it out before cleaning the rollers.
The following image shows examples of the roller location for various printers.
144
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Figure 9-4 Roller locations for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions:
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and ex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and ip it over. Do not fan the
paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
NOTE: Fanning the paper introduces static electricity. Instead of fanning the paper, ex the stack by
holding it at each end and bringing the ends up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to reverse
the U shape. Next, hold each side of the stack of paper and repeat this process. This process releases
individual sheets without introducing static electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a table before
returning it to the tray.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper 145
Figure 9-5 Technique for exing the paper stack
1
2
1
2
A4
A3
2. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
3. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer, and that paper is being stored in
unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep paper dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it might
have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper from the stack.
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If this
happens, remove the paper from the tray and ex the stack as described above.
4. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a dierent package.
5. Make sure the tray is not overlled by checking the stack-height markings inside the tray. If it is overlled,
remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to
the tray.
The following examples show the stack-height markings in the trays for various printers. Most HP printers
have markings similar to these. Also make sure that all sheets of paper are below the tabs near the
stack-height marks. These tabs help hold the paper in the correct position as it enters the printer.
146
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Figure 9-6 Stack-height markings
Figure 9-7 Tab for the paper stack
6. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the marking on
the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or
markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers. Most
HP printers have markings similar to these.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
147
Figure 9-8 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-9 Size markings for cassette trays
7. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper, try these solutions.
NOTE: This information applies to MFP printers only.
● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be removed.
148
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is closed.
● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.
● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the
stack.
● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the paper
stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack.
● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages.
Make sure the paper stack ts below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from the output bin.
● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.
● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.
● From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Supplies button. Check the status
of the document-feeder kit, and replace it if necessary.
Clear paper jams
Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.
Paper jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations.
Figure 9-10 Jam locations
3
2
4
5
1
Number
Description
1 Document feeder
2 Output bin
3 Rear door, fuser, and duplexer area
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2
Clear paper jams 149
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in
the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
1. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a dierent package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overlled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they
are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets
one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is congured correctly for the paper
type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
31.13 jam error in the document feeder
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the document feeder.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 31.13.01 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.02 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.13 Jam in document feeder
In addition to the instructions provided below
NOTE: The printer model referenced in this video might be dierent from your printer model, but the steps to
clear the jam are the same.
150
Chapter 9 Solve problems
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the document feeder cover.
31.13 jam error in the document feeder 151
4. Lift the document feeder input tray to provide better access to the document feeder output bin, and then
remove any jammed paper from the output area.
5. Open the scanner lid. If paper is jammed behind the white plastic backing, gently pull it out.
6. Lower the scanner lid.
152 Chapter 9 Solve problems
7. If the error persists, ensure that the paper meets the document feeder (ADF) specications for the printer.
8. Ensure that the input tray is not overloaded and that the tray guides are set to the correct size. Make sure
that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of the input tray when paper is loaded in the tray. The
correct position of the loaded paper is parallel with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper
path.
Figure 9-11 Set the ADF guides
NOTE:
To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document feeder input tray are adjusted correctly.
Remove all staples, paper clips, or tape from original documents.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals
that are printed on plain paper.
9. Open the document feeder and check and clean the Document Feeder Kit rollers and separation pad by
removing any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with warm water. View the How to Clean the Pick Rollers in HP LaserJet and PageWide
Printers for detailed instructions.
NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly to access and clean the second roller
.
10. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
31.13 jam error in the document feeder
153
NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document feeder input tray are adjusted tightly against the
document. Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals that
are printed on plain paper.
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in tray 1.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1
1. If you can see the jammed sheet in Tray 1, remove the jammed sheet by pulling it straight out.
2. If you cannot see the jammed sheet, close Tray 1, and then remove Tray 2.
154 Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. At the left side of the Tray 2 cavity, press the tab to lower the tray plate, and then remove any paper.
Remove the jammed sheet by gently pulling it straight out.
4. Push the tray plate back up into place.
5. Reinstall Tray 2.
6. Make sure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the printer.
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 155
7. Reopen Tray 1 and load paper into the tray. Ensure the tray guides are set to the correct paper size.
8. Ensure the tray is not overlled. Paper should be below the 3 triangles in the following image.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for a paper jam in tray 2.
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2
156
Chapter 9 Solve problems
1. Pull the tray completely out of the printer.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper.
3. Reinsert and close Tray 2.
NOTE: When reinserting the paper, make sure the paper guides are adjusted properly for the paper size.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
157
4. Open the rear door and look for and clear any paper present or obstructions in the paper path.
5. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the printer.
158 Chapter 9 Solve problems
6. If the error persists, ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the
paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over lled above the ll mark or over the tab (line
below 3 triangles). See following images.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A3 jam error in tray 3
Use the following procedure to check for a paper jam in tray 3.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
13.A3 jam error in tray 3
159
● 13.A3.D3 - Jam in tray 3
1. Pull the tray completely out of the printer.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper.
3. Reinsert and close Tray 3.
NOTE: When reinserting the paper, make sure the paper guides are adjusted properly for the paper size.
160
Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. Open the rear door and look for and clear any paper present or obstructions in the paper path.
5. Check the following are for paper. Remove paper by gently pulling paper out.
13.A3 jam error in tray 3 161
6. If the error persists, ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the
paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over lled above the ll mark or over the tab (line
below 3 triangles). See following images.
7. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the printer.
8. If the error persists, contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP, or contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider.
13.B2 jam error in rear door
Use the following procedure to check for a paper jam in the rear door.
Recommended action for customers
162
Chapter 9 Solve problems
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.A1 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.D1 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.A2 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.D2 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.A3 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.D3 - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.AD - Jam in rear door
● 13.B2.DD - Jam in rear door
1. Pull the tray completely out of the printer.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper.
13.B2 jam error in rear door 163
3. Reinsert and close Tray 3.
NOTE: When reinserting the paper, make sure the paper guides are adjusted properly for the paper size.
4. Open the rear door and look for and clear any paper present or obstructions in the paper path.
164 Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. If the error persists, ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the
paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over lled above the ll mark or over the tab (line
below 3 triangles). See following images.
6. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the printer.
7. If the error persists, contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP, or contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider.
13.B4, 13.B5 jam error in fuser input
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the fuser area.
Recommended action for customers
13.B4, 13.B5 jam error in fuser input
165
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B4.yz Jam in rear door
● 13.B5.yz Jam in rear door
y = jam type (A or D)
z = paper type that is being printer on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Gently pull out any jammed paper from the rollers in the rear door area.
166 Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. If paper is present in the upper rollers, gently pull out any jammed paper from the rollers in the rear door
area.
4. Close the rear door.
5. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the printer.
6. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper loaded.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B9 jam error in fuser output
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the fuser area.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B9.yz Jam in rear door
y = jam type (A, C, or D)
13.B9 jam error in fuser output
167
z = paper type that is being printer on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Gently pull out any jammed paper from the rollers in the rear door area.
3. Close the rear door.
168 Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the
printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the automatic duplexer.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D1.yz Paper jam in duplexer (upper area of duplexer)
● 13.D3.yz Paper jam in duplexer (lower area of duplexer)
y = A or D
x = 0-9 or A-F
1. Check the out area of the printer. If paper is extruding out slowly pull it out of the printer.
2. At the rear of the printer, open the duplexer.
3. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper from the rear door of the printer.
CAUTION: The fuser is located above the rear door, and it is hot. Do not attempt to reach into the
area above the rear door until the fuser is cool.
NOTE: There are 3 areas to check for paper, above the fuser, entering in the duplexer and the exit of the
duplexer.
13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer
169
4. Close the duplexer.
170 Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications for the
printer.
6. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer support at
www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the output bin.
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.E1.yz - jam in output bin
y = A or D
z = 0-9 or A-F
▲ If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
Resolving color print quality problems
Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality, color-quality, and image-quality problems on HP Color
LaserJet Enterprise printers.
Introduction
The troubleshooting steps can help resolve the following defects:
● Blank pages
● Black pages
● Colors that do not align
● Curled paper
● Dark or light bands
● Dark or light streaks
13.E1 jam error in the output bin
171
● Fuzzy print
● Gray background or dark print
● Light print
● Loose toner
● Missing toner
● Scattered dots of toner
●
Skewed images
● Smears
● Streaks
Troubleshoot print quality
To resolve print-quality issues, try these steps in the order presented.
To troubleshoot specic image defects, see Troubleshoot image defects.
Update the printer rmware
Try upgrading the printer rmware.
For instructions, go to www.hp.com/support.
Print from a
dierent software program
Try printing from a dierent software program.
If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.
Check the paper-type setting for the print job
Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears, fuzzy
or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
Check the paper type setting on the control panel
Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.
1. Open and close the paper tray.
2. Follow the control panel prompts to conrm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.
3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specications.
4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.
a. Open the following menus:
i. Settings
ii. Copy/Print
iii. Print quality
172
Chapter 9 Solve problems
iv. Adjust paper type
b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.
c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.
5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button
to print the job.
Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. By default, the print driver displays the Copies & Pages menu. Open the menus drop-down list, and then
click the Finishing menu.
4. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Check toner-cartridge status
Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the status of
other replaceable maintenance parts.
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
2. Select the Conguration/Status Pages menu.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
173
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and, if
applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The
supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very low
threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts, the
supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on
identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page
During the printing process paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and can cause
print-quality issues such as toner specks or spatter, smears, streaks, lines, or repeating marks.
Follow these steps to clean the printer paper path:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Cleaning Page
3. Select Print to print the page.
A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control panel. The cleaning process takes a few minutes to
complete. Do not turn the printer o until the cleaning process has nished. When it is nished, discard the
printed page.
Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges
Follow these steps to inspect each toner cartridge:
1. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.
2. Check the memory chip for damage.
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum.
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality
problems.
174
Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. If you see any scratches, ngerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the toner cartridge.
5. Reinstall the toner cartridge and print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.
Check paper and the printing environment
Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specications
Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specications.
● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids,
staples, and curled or bent edges.
● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.
● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet
printers.
● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment
The environment can directly aect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-feeding issues.
Try the following solutions:
● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.
● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specications.
● Do not place the printer in a conned space, such as a cabinet.
● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air ow on all sides,
including the top.
● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue inside
the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when printing
from specic trays.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Image Registration
Check paper and the printing environment
175
3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.
6. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a dierent print driver
Try a dierent print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected lines
in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download any of the following drivers from the HP Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP.
Table 9-2 Print drivers
Driver Description
HP PCL.6 driver If available, this printer-specic print driver supports older operating systems like
Windows XP and Windows Vista. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.
HP PCL 6 driver This printer-specic print driver supports Windows 7 and newer operating systems
that support version 3 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.
HP PCL-6 driver This product-specic print driver supports Windows 8 and newer operating systems
that support version 4 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.
HP UPD PS driver ● Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or with other highly
graphics-intensive software programs
● Provides support for printing from Postscript emulation needs, or for Postscript ash
font support
HP UPD PCL 6 ● Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
● Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most
users
● Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in
Windows environments
● Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are
based on PCL 5
Troubleshoot color quality
Calibrating the printer can help ensure color print quality.
Calibrate the printer to align the colors
Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality.
Follow these steps to resolve print-quality problems such as misaligned color, colored shadows, blurry graphics,
or other print-quality issues.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
176
Chapter 9 Solve problems
2. Select the following menus:
● Maintenance
● Calibration/Cleaning
● Full Calibration
3. Select Start to start the calibration process.
A Calibrating message will display on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few minutes
to complete. Do not turn the printer o until the calibration process has nished.
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.
Troubleshoot image defects
Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Table 9-3 Image defects table quick reference
Defect Defect Defect
Table 9-11 Light print on page 182 Table 9-9 Gray background or dark print on
page 181
Table 9-6 Blank page — No print on page
180
Table 9-5 Black page on page 179 Table 9-4 Banding defects on page 179 Table 9-13 Streak defects on page 183
Troubleshoot image defects 177
Table 9-3 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Defect Defect Defect
Table 9-8 Fixing/fuser defects on page 180 Table 9-10 Image placement defects on
page 182
Table 9-7 Color plane registrations defects
(color models only) on page 180
Table 9-12 Output defects on page 183
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a
starting point for solving image defect issues.
1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with
continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has passed the
rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try using
a dierent ream of media or a dierent tray. Try using a dierent print mode.
4. Make sure the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See the printer support page
at support.hp.com for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term "fusing" refers to the part of the printing process where toner is aixed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer with the short edge rst.
178
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-4 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat down the
length of the page, and are wide-pitch
and/or impulse bands. They might be sharp
or soft in nature. The defect displays only in
areas of ll, not in text or sections with no
printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Try printing from another tray.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. Use a dierent paper type.
5. Enterprise models only: From the
Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print mode
that is designed for a slightly heavier
media than what you are using. This
slows the print speed and might
improve the print quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-5 Black page
Sample Description Possible solutions
The entire printed page is black.
1. Visually inspect the cartridge to check
for damage.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 179
Table 9-6 Blank page — No print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The page is completely blank and contains
no printed content.
1. Make sure that the cartridges are
genuine HP cartridges.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Print with a dierent cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-7 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)
Sample Description Possible solutions
One or more color plane(s) is not aligned
with the other color planes. This registration
error will typically occur with yellow.
1. Reprint the document.
2. From the printer control panel,
calibrate the printer.
3. If a cartridge has reached a Very Low
state, or the printed output is severely
faded, replace the cartridge.
4. From the printer control panel use the
Restore Calibration feature to reset
the printer's calibration settings to the
factory defaults.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-8 Fixing/fuser defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Slight shadows or osets of the image
are repeated down the page. The repeated
image might fade with each recurrence.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
180 Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-8 Fixing/fuser defects (continued)
Sample Description Possible solutions
Toner rubs o along either edge of the
page. This defect is more common at the
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light
media types, but can occur anywhere on the
page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a heavier
paper type.
3. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, go to the Edge
to-Edge menu and then select Normal.
Reprint the document.
4. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint the
document.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-9 Gray background or dark print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image or text is darker than expected
and/or the background is gray.
1. Make sure that the paper in the trays
has not already been run through the
printer.
2. Use a dierent paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From the Home
screen on the printer control panel,
go to the Adjust Toner Density menu,
and then adjust the toner density to a
lower level.
5. Make sure that the printer is within the
supported operating temperature and
humidity range.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 181
Table 9-10 Image placement defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image is not centered, or is skewed on
the page. The defect occurs when the paper
is not positioned properly as it is pulled from
the tray and moves through the paper path.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the paper and then reload
the tray. Make sure that all the paper
edges are even on all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper
stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overll the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper guides are
adjusted to the correct size for the
paper. Do not adjust the paper guides
tightly against the paper stack. Adjust
them to the indentations or markings
in the tray.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-11 Light print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The printed content is light or faded on the
entire page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner. Reinsert
the toner cartridges into the printer
and close the cover. For a graphical
representation of this procedure, see
Replace the toner cartridges.
3. Mono models only: Make sure that the
EconoMode setting is disabled, both
at the printer control panel and in the
print driver.
4. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
5. Print a Supplies Status Page and check
the life and usage of the cartridge.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
182 Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-12 Output defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Printed pages have curled edges. The curled
edge can be along the short or long side of
the paper. Two types of curl are possible:
● Positive curl: The paper curls toward
the printed side. The defect occurs
in dry environments or when printing
high-coverage pages.
● Negative curl: The paper curls away
from the printed side. The defect
occurs in high-humidity environments
or when printing low-coverage pages.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Positive curl: From the printer control
panel, select a heavier paper type. The
heavier paper type creates a higher
temperature for printing.
Negative curl: From the printer control
panel, select a lighter paper type. The
lighter paper type creates a lower
temperature for printing. Try storing
the paper in a dry environment prior to
use, or use freshly opened paper.
3. Print in duplex mode.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
The paper does not stack well in the output
tray. The stack might be uneven, skewed,
or the pages might be pushed out of the
tray and onto the oor. Any of the following
conditions can cause this defect:
● Extreme paper curl
● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or
deformed
● The paper is a non-standard paper
type, such as envelopes
● The output tray is too full
1. Reprint the document.
2. Extend the output bin extension.
3. If the defect is caused by
extreme paper curl, refer to the
troubleshooting steps for "Output
curl."
4. Use a dierent paper type.
5. Use freshly opened paper.
6. Remove the paper from the output
tray before the tray gets too full.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-13 Streak defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Light vertical streaks that usually span the
length of the page. The defect displays only
in areas of ll, not in text or sections with no
printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner. Reinsert
the toner cartridges into the printer
and close the cover. For a graphical
representation of this procedure, see
Replace the toner cartridges.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
NOTE: Both light and dark vertical streaks
can occur when the printing environment is
outside the specied range for temperature
or humidity. Refer to your printer's
environmental
specications for allowable
temperature and humidity levels.
Troubleshoot image defects 183
Table 9-13 Streak defects (continued)
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark vertical lines which occur down the
length of the page. The defect might occur
anywhere on the page, in areas of ll or in
sections with no printed content. On color
models, these lines or streaks will also be
visible on the ITB cleaning page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner. Reinsert
the toner cartridges into the printer
and close the cover. For a graphical
representation of this procedure, see
Replace the toner cartridges.
3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the cartridge.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Improve copy image quality
If the printer is having copy quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve the
issue.
Try these few simple steps rst:
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic backing, which
might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks,
unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
184 Chapter 9 Solve problems
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft cloth or
sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
3
2
1
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any
part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They
might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be sure
to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
185
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Calibrate the scanner
Calibration is a process that optimizes scan quality.
NOTE: When using the document feeder, make sure to adjust the guides in the input tray so they are against
the original document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Support Tools application, and then
select the Support Tools icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Calibrate Scanner
3. Touch the Start button to start the calibration process. Follow the on-screen prompts.
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try copying again.
Check the paper settings
Follow these steps if copied pages have smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, or areas where pigment has
dropped out.
Check the paper selection options
Use the following steps to check the paper selection options.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Paper Selection.
3. Select Paper size, and then select one of the predened options.
4. Select Paper type, and then select one of the predened options.
5. Select Paper tray, and then select one of the predened options.
6. Select Done to save the paper selection options.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Copy menu to optimize image quality.
186
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
●
Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
3. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and select Done.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
Optimize the copy job for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
3. Select one of the predened options.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Edge-to-edge copying
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is
printed close to the edges.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Edge-To-Edge.
3. Select the Edge-To-Edge output option if the original document is printed close to the paper edges.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
187
Improve scan image quality
Try the following basic solutions to improve scanned image quality.
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic backing, which
might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks,
unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
188 Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft cloth or
sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
3
2
1
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any
part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They
might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be sure
to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the resolution settings
Follow these steps to adjust the resolution setting. Setting the resolution to a high value increases the le size
and the scan time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
Check the resolution settings
189
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened Resolution options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
Check the color settings
Follow these steps to adjust the color setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Save to Device Memory
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Touch the Options button.
4. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Color/Black.
5. Select one of the predened options.
6. Touch the Send button.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Scan menu to optimize image quality.
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
● Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
190
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
● Scan to Job Storage
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
Optimize the scan job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
● Scan to Job Storage
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Check the output-quality settings
This setting adjusts the level of compression when saving the
le. For the highest quality, select the highest
setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
191
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened Quality and File Size options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
Improve fax image quality
If the printer is having fax quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve the
issue.
Try these few simple steps rst:
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic backing, which
might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks,
unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
192 Chapter 9 Solve problems
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft cloth or
sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
3
2
1
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any
part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They
might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be sure
to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
193
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the send-fax resolution settings
Adjust the resolution of outgoing faxes as needed. A higher resolution setting increases the fax size and send
time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened options, and then select Send to send the fax.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the
Fax menu to optimize image quality.
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
● Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures
Optimize the fax job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
194
Chapter 9 Solve problems
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Check the error-correction setting
Make sure the Error Correction Mode setting is enabled. This setting can improve image quality.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Select the Error Correction Mode option. Touch the Done button.
Check the
t-to-page setting
If the Fit to Page setting is enabled, and the incoming fax is larger than the default page size, the printer attempts
to scale the image to t the page. If this setting is disabled, larger images split across multiple pages.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select the
Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Default Job Options
d. Fit to Page
3. Select the On option to enable the setting, or select the O option to disable it.
Send to a
dierent fax machine
The problem might be related to fax machine settings or supplies status.
Try sending the fax to a dierent fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is related to the initial
recipient's fax machine settings or supplies status.
Check the error-correction setting
195
Check the sender's fax machine
Try the following to check the sender's fax machine.
Ask the sender to try sending from a dierent fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is with the
sender's fax machine. If a dierent fax machine is unavailable, ask the sender to consider making the following
changes:
● Make sure the original document is on white (not colored) paper.
● Increase the fax resolution, quality level, or contrast settings.
● If possible, send the fax from a computer software program.
Solve wired network problems
Check the following information to resolve wired network issues.
Introduction
Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication problem. These problems include the
following issues:
Poor physical connection
Check the cable connections.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity light
ashes indicating network traic, and the green link-status light is continuously lit indicating a network link.
4. If the problem continues, try a dierent cable or port on the hub.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
Verify that the printer is communicating with the network and your computer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings,
the printer, and the computer are all congured for the same network (also known as subnet).
3. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer is
selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer conguration page.
196
Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this
printer, even if its IP address changes.
5. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the printer’s hostname instead of the
IP address.
6. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
7. Reinstall the printer software and driver.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you
must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
An incorrectly congured computer can cause issues with printing.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is congured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Check the network settings.
1. Review the printer’s conguration/networking pages to check the status of the network settings and
protocols.
2. Recongure the network settings if necessary.
Solve wireless network problems
Check the following information to resolve wireless network issues.
Introduction
Use the troubleshooting information to help resolve issues.
NOTE: To determine whether HP NFC, Wi-Fi, BLE, or other wireless printing capabilities are enabled on the
printer, print a conguration page from the printer control panel.
NOTE: If you have been experiencing intermittent loss of network connectivity, rst update the printer
rmware. For instructions on how to update the printer rmware, go to http://support.hp.com, search for your
printer, and then search on “update the rmware.”
Wireless connectivity checklist
Use the checklist to help resolve wireless connection issues.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
197
● For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, verify that the network cable
is not connected.
● Verify that the printer and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure that the
wireless radio in the printer is turned on. (The wireless network indicator is solid when the printer is
connected to a wireless network, and blinking when it is searching for a wireless network.)
● Verify that the service set identier (SSID) is correct:
– For a wireless connection to your network, conrm that your mobile device is connecting to the correct
router/access point.
– For a Wi-Fi Direct connection, print a conguration page to determine the printer’s SSID.
If you are not sure that the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again.
● With secured networks, verify that the security information is correct. If the security information is incorrect,
run the wireless setup again.
● If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless network. If the
network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over a wireless connection.
● Verify that the encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the printer as it is for the wireless access
point (on networks using WPA security).
● Verify that the printer is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the printer must be
within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router).
● Verify that obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access
point and the printer. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete do not
separate the printer and wireless access point.
● Verify that the printer is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security system
cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.
● For computers connecting to the wireless printer:
– Verify that the print driver is installed on the computer.
– Verify that you have selected the correct printer port.
– Verify that the computer and printer connect to the same wireless network.
– If your environment has multiple wireless signals and you need the printer to support dual band
networks on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, install the HP Jetdirect 2900nw print server accessory.
– For macOS, verify that the wireless router supports Bonjour.
The printer does not print after the wireless
conguration completes
Resolve issues between your computer and the printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
2. Turn o any third-party rewalls on your computer.
3. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
198
Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
5. Verify that you can open the printer HP Embedded Web Server from a computer on the network.
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed
Verify that a rewall is not interfering with wireless communication.
1. Update the rewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer.
2. If programs request rewall access when you install the printer or try to print, make sure that you allow the
programs to run.
3. Temporarily turn o the rewall, and then install the wireless printer on the computer. Enable the rewall
when you have completed the wireless installation.
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer
Verify that the printer and network settings are correct.
1. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that your computer connects to.
2. Print a conguration page.
3. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration page to the SSID in the printer conguration
for the computer.
4. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Recongure the
wireless setup for the printer.
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer
Complete the following steps to solve connection issues.
1. Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block the signal.
For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point.
2. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
3. Make sure there are not more than 5 concurrent Wireless Print Direct users.
4. Turn o any third-party rewalls on your computer.
5. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
6. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN
Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list
Follow these steps when the network does not appear in the wireless network list on your computer or mobile
device.
● Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power.
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party
rewall installed 199
● The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network. Make sure the
router/access point is advertising the SSID by checking for its SSID in the available networks seen by your
mobile device.
The wireless network is not functioning
Complete the following steps to ensure that the network is functioning correctly.
1. For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, make sure that the network
cable is disconnected.
2. To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network.
3. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the router IP address.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
4. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that the computer connects to.
a. Print a conguration page.
b. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration report to the SSID in the printer
conguration for the computer.
c. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Recongure the
wireless setup for the printer.
Reduce interference on a wireless network
The following tips can reduce interference in a wireless network:
● Keep the wireless devices away from large metal objects, such as ling cabinets, and other electromagnetic
devices, such as microwaves and cordless telephones. These objects can disrupt radio signals.
● Keep the wireless devices away from large masonry structures and other building structures. These objects
can absorb radio waves and lower signal strength.
● Position the wireless router in a central location in line of sight with the wireless printers on the network.
Solve fax problems
Use the following sections to solve issues involving the printer fax functions.
Checklist for solving fax problems
Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter:
200
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested with the
supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specications. Do not substitute another fax cable; the
analog-fax accessory requires an analog-fax cable. It also requires an analog phone connection.
● Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory? Make sure that the phone jack is
correctly seated in the outlet. Insert the connector into the outlet until it "clicks."
NOTE: Verify that the phone jack is connected to the fax port rather than to the network port. The ports
are similar.
● Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack.
Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make or receive a phone call?
What type of phone line are you using?
Verify the type of phone line you are using, and review the recommendations for that type of line.
● Dedicated line: A standard analog fax/phone line assigned to receive or send faxes.
NOTE: The phone line should be for printer fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone
devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notications to a monitoring
company.
● PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an
analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory.
You might need an interfacing Analog Telephone Adapter (ATA) to connect the fax machine to digital PBX
systems.
● Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line when the rst
incoming line is busy. Try attaching the printer to the rst incoming phone line. The fax accessory answers
the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-to-answer setting.
Are you using a surge-protection device?
A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory
against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some fax communication
problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal.
If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the printer
directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection device.
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax
accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes.
If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory
answers all calls.
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in
progress, which causes a communication error.
Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line.
What type of phone line are you using?
201
Check fax accessory status
If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Conguration Page report to check the
status.
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and select Reports.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Conguration/Status Pages
b. Conguration Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the screen. The
report consists of several pages.
NOTE: The printer IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.
4. On the Fax Accessory Page of the Conguration Page, under the Hardware Information heading, check the
Modem Status. The following table identies the status conditions and possible solutions.
NOTE: If the Fax Accessory Page does not print, there might be a problem with the analog fax accessory. If
you are using LAN fax or Internet fax, those congurations could be disabling the feature.
Table 9-14 Analog-fax accessory troubleshooting
Status conditions Possible solutions
Operational / Enabled
1
The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.
Operational / Disabled
1
The fax accessory is installed, but you have not congured the
required fax settings yet.
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the
HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the printer fax
feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the
analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either LAN
fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: If LAN fax is enabled, the Scan to Fax feature is
unavailable on the printer control panel.
Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled
1
The printer has detected a rmware failure. Upgrade the
rmware.
Damaged / Enabled/Disabled
1
The fax accessory has failed. Reseat the fax accessory card and
check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED, replace the
analog-fax accessory card.
1 ENABLED indicates that the analog-fax accessory is enabled and turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled (analog fax
is turned o).
General fax problems
Learn about solutions for common fax problems.
The fax failed to send
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
JBIG is enabled, and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability.
202
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Turn o the JBIG setting.
No fax address book button displays
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
None of the contacts in the selected contacts list have fax information associated with them. Add the necessary
fax information.
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.
Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
For all forwarded faxes, the printer appends the overlay header to the top of a page.
This is normal operation.
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
Names and numbers can both display, depending on where they are from. The fax address book lists names, and
all other databases list numbers.
This is normal operation.
A one-page fax prints as two pages
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.
To print a one page fax on a single page, set the overlay header to overlay mode, or adjust the t-to-page setting.
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
A jam is in the document feeder.
Clear the jam, and send the fax again.
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The volume setting needs to be adjusted.
Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu.
No fax address book button displays
203
204 Chapter 9 Solve problems
Service and supportA
HP limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY*
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480 One-year, next-business day, onsite warranty
NOTE: *Warranty and support options vary by product, country, and local legal requirements. Go to
support.hp.com to learn about HP award-winning service and support options in your region.
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, this HP Limited Warranty applies only to HP branded products
sold or leased a) from HP Inc., its subsidiaries, ailiates, authorized resellers, authorized distributors, or country
distributors; and, b) with this HP Limited Warranty, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects
in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specied above. If HP receives notice of
such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be
defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of
purchase, for the period specied above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed
and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does
not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within
a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration,
(b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modication or misuse, (d)
operation outside of the published environmental specications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation
or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY
OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of
an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specic
legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state,
or province to province.
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product
and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local
standards. HP will not alter form, t or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it
was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
Service and support
205
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA),
OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or
provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation
or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO
THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
UK, Ireland, and Malta
The HP Limited Warranty is a commercial guarantee voluntarily provided by HP. The name and address of the HP
entity responsible for the performance of the HP Limited Warranty in your country/region is as follows:
UK: HP Inc UK Limited, Cain Road, Amen Corner, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1HN
Ireland: Hewlett-Packard Ireland Limited, Liey Park Technology Campus, Barnhall Road, Leixlip, Co.Kildare
Malta: Hewlett-Packard Europe B.V., Amsterdam, Meyrin Branch, Route du Nant-d'Avril 150, 1217 Meyrin,
Switzerland
United Kingdom: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any legal rights to a guarantee
from seller of nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale. These rights expire six years from delivery
of goods for products purchased in England or Wales and ve years from delivery of goods for products
purchased in Scotland. However various factors may impact your eligibility to receive these rights. For further
information, please consult the following link: Consumer Legal Guarantee (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may
visit the European Consumer Centers website (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Consumers have the right to choose whether to claim service under the
HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under the legal guarantee.
Ireland: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any statutory rights from seller in relation to
nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale. However various factors may impact your eligibility to receive
these rights. Consumer statutory rights are not limited or aected in any manner by HP Care Pack. For further
information, please consult the following link: Consumer Legal Guarantee (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may
visit the European Consumer Centers website (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Consumers have the right to choose whether to claim service under the
HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under the legal guarantee.
Malta: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any legal rights to a two-year
guarantee from seller of nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale; however various
factors may impact your eligibility to receive these rights. Consumer statutory rights are not
limited or aected in any manner by the HP Limited Warranty. For further information, please
consult the following link: Consumer Legal Guarantee (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may visit
the European Consumer Centers website (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Consumers have the right to choose whether to claim service under
the HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under two-year legal guarantee.
Austria, Belgium, Germany, and Luxemburg
Die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie ist eine von HP auf freiwilliger Basis angebotene kommerzielle Garantie.
Der Name und die Adresse der HP Gesellschaft, die in Ihrem Land für die Gewährung der beschränkten
HP Herstellergarantie verantwortlich ist, sind wie folgt:
Deutschland: HP Deutschland GmbH, Schickardstr. 32, D-71034 Böblingen
206
Appendix A Service and support
Österreich: HP Austria GmbH., Technologiestrasse 5, A-1120 Wien
Luxemburg: Hewlett-Packard Luxembourg S.C.A., 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, Rue Pafebruc, L-8308 Capellen
Belgien: HP Belgium BVBA, Hermeslaan 1A, B-1831 Diegem
Die Rechte aus der beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie gelten zusätzlich zu den gesetzlichen Ansprüchen
wegen Sachmängeln auf eine zweijährige Gewährleistung ab dem Lieferdatum. Ob Sie Anspruch auf diese
Rechte haben, hängt von zahlreichen Faktoren ab. Die Rechte des Kunden sind in keiner Weise durch die
beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie eingeschränkt bzw. betroen. Weitere Hinweise nden Sie auf der folgenden
Website: Gewährleistungsansprüche für Verbraucher (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) oder Sie können die Website
des Europäischen Verbraucherzentrums (
http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm) besuchen. Verbraucher haben das Recht zu wählen, ob sie eine Leistung
von HP gemäß der beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie in Anspruch nehmen oder ob sie sich gemäß der
gesetzlichen zweijährigen Haftung für Sachmängel (Gewährleistung) sich an den jeweiligen Verkäufer wenden.
Belgium, France, and Luxemburg
La garantie limitée HP est une garantie commerciale fournie volontairement par HP. Voici les coordonnées de
l'entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie limitée HP dans votre pays:
France: HP France SAS, société par actions simpliée identiée sous le numéro 448 694 133 RCS Evry, 1 Avenue
du Canada, 91947, Les Ulis
G.D. Luxembourg: Hewlett-Packard Luxembourg S.C.A., 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, Rue Pafebruc, L-8308
Capellen
Belgique: HP Belgium BVBA, Hermeslaan 1A, B-1831 Diegem
France: Les avantages de la garantie limitée HP s'appliquent en complément des droits dont vous disposez
au titre des garanties légales applicables dont le bénéce est soumis à des conditions spéciques. Vos droits
en tant que consommateur au titre de la garantie légale de conformité mentionnée aux articles L. 211-4 à L.
211-13 du Code de la Consommation et de celle relatives aux défauts de la chose vendue, dans les conditions
prévues aux articles 1641 à 1648 et 2232 du Code de Commerce ne sont en aucune façon limités ou aectés
par la garantie limitée HP. Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez consulter le lien suivant : Garanties
légales accordées au consommateur (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal). Vous pouvez également consulter le site Web
des Centres européens des consommateurs (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Les consommateurs ont le droit de choisir d’exercer leurs droits au titre
de la garantie limitée HP, ou auprès du vendeur au titre des garanties légales applicables mentionnées ci-dessus.
POUR RAPPEL:
Garantie Légale de Conformité:
« Le vendeur est tenu de livrer un bien conforme au contrat et répond des défauts de conformité existant lors de la
délivrance.
Il répond également des défauts de conformité résultant de l'emballage, des instructions de montage ou de
l'installation lorsque celle-ci a été mise à sa charge par le contrat ou a été réalisée sous sa responsabilité ».
Article L211-5 du Code de la Consommation:
« Pour être conforme au contrat, le bien doit:
1° Etre propre à l'usage habituellement attendu d'un bien semblable et, le cas échéant:
- correspondre à la description donnée par le vendeur et posséder les qualités que celui-ci a présentées à l'acheteur
sous forme d'échantillon ou de modèle;
Belgium, France, and Luxemburg
207
- présenter les qualités qu'un acheteur peut légitimement attendre eu égard aux déclarations publiques faites par
le vendeur, par le producteur ou par son représentant, notamment dans la publicité ou l'étiquetage;
2° Ou présenter les caractéristiques dénies d'un commun accord par les parties ou être propre à tout usage
spécial recherché par l'acheteur, porté à la connaissance du vendeur et que ce dernier a accepté ».
Article L211-12 du Code de la Consommation:
« L'action résultant du défaut de conformité se prescrit par deux ans à compter de la délivrance du bien ».
Garantie des vices cachés
Article 1641 du Code Civil : « Le vendeur est tenu de la garantie à raison des défauts cachés de la chose vendue qui
la rendent impropre à l'usage auquel on la destine, ou qui diminuent tellement cet usage que l'acheteur ne l'aurait
pas acquise, ou n'en aurait donné qu'un moindre prix, s'il les avait connus. »
Article 1648 alinéa 1 du Code Civil:
« L'action résultant des vices rédhibitoires doit être intentée par l'acquéreur dans un délai de deux ans à compter de
la découverte du vice. »
G.D. Luxembourg et Belgique: Les avantages de la garantie limitée HP s'appliquent en complément des
droits dont vous disposez au titre de la garantie de non-conformité des biens avec le contrat de vente.
Cependant, de nombreux facteurs peuvent avoir un impact sur le bénéce de ces droits. Vos droits en
tant que consommateur au titre de ces garanties ne sont en aucune façon limités ou aectés par la
garantie limitée HP. Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez consulter le lien suivant: Garanties légales
accordées au consommateur (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou vous pouvez également consulter le site Web
des Centres européens des consommateurs (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Les consommateurs ont le droit de choisir de réclamer un service sous la
garantie limitée HP ou auprès du vendeur au cours d'une garantie légale de deux ans.
Italy
La Garanzia limitata HP è una garanzia commerciale fornita volontariamente da HP. Di seguito sono indicati nome
e indirizzo della società HP responsabile della fornitura dei servizi coperti dalla Garanzia limitata HP nel vostro
Paese:
Italia: HP Italy S.r.l., Via G. Di Vittorio 9, 20063 Cernusco S/Naviglio
I vantaggi della Garanzia limitata HP vengono concessi ai consumatori in aggiunta ai diritti derivanti
dalla garanzia di due anni fornita dal venditore in caso di non conformità dei beni rispetto al contratto
di vendita. Tuttavia, diversi fattori possono avere un impatto sulla possibilita’ di beneciare di tali
diritti. I diritti spettanti ai consumatori in forza della garanzia legale non sono in alcun modo limitati,
né modicati dalla Garanzia limitata HP. Per ulteriori informazioni, si prega di consultare il seguente
link: Garanzia legale per i clienti (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), oppure visitare il sito Web dei Centri
europei per i consumatori (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). I consumatori hanno il diritto di scegliere se richiedere un servizio usufruendo della Garanzia
limitata HP oppure rivolgendosi al venditore per far valere la garanzia legale di due anni.
Spain
Su Garantía limitada de HP es una garantía comercial voluntariamente proporcionada por HP. El nombre
y dirección de las entidades HP que proporcionan la Garantía limitada de HP (garantía comercial adicional del
fabricante) en su país es:
España: Hewlett-Packard Española S.L. Calle Vicente Aleixandre, 1 Parque Empresarial Madrid - Las Rozas,
E-28232 Madrid
208
Appendix A Service and support
Los benecios de la Garantía limitada de HP son adicionales a la garantía legal de 2 años a la
que los consumidores tienen derecho a recibir del vendedor en virtud del contrato de compraventa;
sin embargo, varios factores pueden afectar su derecho a recibir los benecios bajo dicha garantía
legal. A este respecto, la Garantía limitada de HP no limita o afecta en modo alguno los derechos
legales del consumidor (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal). Para más información, consulte el siguiente enlace:
Garantía legal del consumidor o puede visitar el sitio web de los Centros europeos de los consumidores
(http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Los
clientes tienen derecho a elegir si reclaman un servicio acogiéndose a la Garantía limitada de HP o al vendedor de
conformidad con la garantía legal de dos años.
Denmark
Den begrænsede HP-garanti er en garanti, der ydes frivilligt af HP. Navn og adresse på det HP-selskab, der er
ansvarligt for HP's begrænsede garanti i dit land, er som følger:
Danmark: HP Inc Danmark ApS, Engholm Parkvej 8, 3450, Allerød
Den begrænsede HP-garanti gælder i tillæg til eventuelle juridiske rettigheder, for en toårig garanti
fra sælgeren af varer, der ikke er i overensstemmelse med salgsaftalen, men forskellige faktorer kan
dog påvirke din ret til at opnå disse rettigheder. Forbrugerens lovbestemte rettigheder begrænses
eller påvirkes ikke på nogen måde af den begrænsede HP-garanti. Se nedenstående link for at få
yderligere oplysninger: Forbrugerens juridiske garanti (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller du kan besøge
De Europæiske Forbrugercentres websted (
http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Forbrugere har ret til at vælge, om de vil gøre krav på service i henhold til
HP's begrænsede garanti eller hos sælger i henhold til en toårig juridisk garanti.
Norway
HPs garanti er en begrenset og kommersiell garanti som HP selv har valgt å tilby. Følgende lokale selskap
innestår for garantien:
Norge: HP Norge AS, Rolfbuktveien 4b, 1364 Fornebu
HPs garanti kommer i tillegg til det mangelsansvar HP har i henhold til norsk forbrukerkjøpslovgivning, hvor
reklamasjonsperioden kan være to eller fem år, avhengig av hvor lenge salgsgjenstanden var ment å vare.
Ulike faktorer kan imidlertid ha betydning for om du kvaliserer til å kreve avhjelp iht slikt mangelsansvar.
Forbrukerens lovmessige rettigheter begrenses ikke av HPs garanti. Hvis du vil ha mer informasjon, kan du klikke
på følgende kobling: Juridisk garanti for forbruker (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller du kan besøke nettstedet
til de europeiske forbrukersentrene (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Forbrukere har retten til å velge å kreve service under HPs garanti eller
iht selgerens lovpålagte mangelsansvar.
Sweden
HP:s begränsade garanti är en kommersiell garanti som tillhandahålls frivilligt av HP. Namn och adress till det
HP-företag som ansvarar för HP:s begränsade garanti i ditt land är som följer:
Sverige: HP PPS Sverige AB, SE-169 73 Stockholm
Fördelarna som ingår i HP:s begränsade garanti gäller utöver de lagstadgade rättigheterna till tre års
garanti från säljaren angående varans bristande överensstämmelse gentemot köpeavtalet, men olika
faktorer kan påverka din rätt att utnyttja dessa rättigheter. Konsumentens lagstadgade rättigheter varken
begränsas eller påverkas på något sätt av HP:s begränsade garanti. Mer information får du om du
följer denna länk: Lagstadgad garanti för konsumenter (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller så kan du gå
till European Consumer Centers webbplats (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Konsumenter har rätt att välja om de vill ställa krav enligt HP:s
begränsade garanti eller på säljaren enligt den lagstadgade treåriga garantin.
Denmark
209
Portugal
A Garantia Limitada HP é uma garantia comercial fornecida voluntariamente pela HP. O nome e a morada da
entidade HP responsável pela prestação da Garantia Limitada HP no seu país são os seguintes:
Portugal: HPCP – Computing and Printing Portugal, Unipessoal, Lda., Edicio D. Sancho I, Quinta da Fonte, Porto
Salvo, Lisboa, Oeiras, 2740 244
As vantagens da Garantia Limitada HP aplicam-se cumulativamente com quaisquer direitos decorrentes
da legislação aplicável à garantia de dois anos do vendedor, relativa a defeitos do produto e constante
do contrato de venda. Existem, contudo, vários fatores que poderão afetar a sua elegibilidade para
beneciar de tais direitos. Os direitos legalmente atribuídos aos consumidores não são limitados ou
afetados de forma alguma pela Garantia Limitada HP. Para mais informações, consulte a ligação seguinte:
Garantia legal do consumidor (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou visite o Web site da Rede dos Centros
Europeus do Consumidor (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Os consumidores têm o direito de escolher se pretendem reclamar assistência ao abrigo da
Garantia Limitada HP ou contra o vendedor ao abrigo de uma garantia jurídica de dois anos.
Greece and Cyprus
Η Περιορισμένη εγγύηση HP είναι μια εμπορική εγγύηση η οποία παρέχεται εθελοντικά από την HP. Η επωνυμία
και η διεύθυνση του νομικού προσώπου ΗΡ που παρέχει την Περιορισμένη εγγύηση ΗΡ στη χώρα σας είναι η
εξής:
Ελλάδα /Κύπρoς: HP Printing and Personal Systems Hellas EPE, Tzavella 1-3, 15232 Chalandri, Attiki
Ελλάδα /Κύπρoς: HP Συστήματα Εκτύπωσης και Προσωπικών Υπολογιστών Ελλάς Εταιρεία Περιορισμένης
Ευθύνης, Tzavella 1-3, 15232 Chalandri, Attiki
Τα προνόμια της Περιορισμένης εγγύησης HP ισχύουν επιπλέον των νόμιμων δικαιωμάτων για διετή εγγύηση
έναντι του Πωλητή για τη μη συμμόρφωση των προϊόντων με τις συνομολογημένες συμβατικά ιδιότητες,
ωστόσο η άσκηση των δικαιωμάτων σας αυτών μπορεί να εξαρτάται από διάφορους παράγοντες. Τα
νόμιμα δικαιώματα των καταναλωτών δεν περιορίζονται ούτε επηρεάζονται καθ’ οιονδήποτε τρόπο από
την Περιορισμένη εγγύηση HP. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, συμβουλευτείτε την ακόλουθη τοποθεσία
web: Νόμιμη εγγύηση καταναλωτή (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ή μπορείτε να επισκεφτείτε την τοποθεσία
web των Ευρωπαϊκών Κέντρων Καταναλωτή (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Οι καταναλωτές έχουν το δικαίωμα να επιλέξουν αν θα αξιώσουν την
υπηρεσία στα πλαίσια της Περιορισμένης εγγύησης ΗΡ ή από τον πωλητή στα πλαίσια της νόμιμης εγγύησης
δύο ετών.
Hungary
A HP korlátozott jótállás egy olyan kereskedelmi jótállás, amelyet a HP a saját elhatározásából biztosít. Az egyes
országokban a HP mint gyártó által vállalt korlátozott jótállást biztosító HP vállalatok neve és címe:
Magyarország: HP Inc Magyarország Kft., H-1117 Budapest, Alíz utca 1.
A HP korlátozott jótállásban biztosított jogok azokon a jogokon felül illetik meg Önt, amelyek
a termékeknek az adásvételi szerződés szerinti minőségére vonatkozó kétéves, jogszabályban foglalt
eladói szavatosságból, továbbá ha az Ön által vásárolt termékre alkalmazandó, a jogszabályban
foglalt kötelező eladói jótállásból erednek, azonban számos körülmény hatással lehet arra, hogy
ezek a jogok Önt megilletik-e. További információért kérjük, keresse fel a következő webhelyet:
Jogi Tájékoztató Fogyasztóknak (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) vagy látogassa meg az Európai Fogyasztói
Központok webhelyét (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). A fogyasztóknak jogában áll, hogy megválasszák, hogy a jótállással kapcsolatos igényüket
210
Appendix A Service and support
a HP korlátozott jótállás alapján vagy a kétéves, jogszabályban foglalt eladói szavatosság, illetve, ha
alkalmazandó, a jogszabályban foglalt kötelező eladói jótállás alapján érvényesítik.
Czech Republic
Omezená záruka HP je obchodní zárukou dobrovolně poskytovanou společností HP. Názvy a adresy společností
skupiny HP, které odpovídají za plnění omezené záruky HP ve vaší zemi, jsou následující:
Česká republika: HP Inc Czech Republic s. r. o., Za Brumlovkou 5/1559, 140 00 Praha 4
Výhody, poskytované omezenou zárukou HP, se uplatňuji jako doplňek k jakýmkoli právním nárokům na
dvouletou záruku poskytnutou prodejcem v případě nesouladu zboží s kupní smlouvou. Váš nárok na
uznání těchto práv však může záviset na mnohých faktorech. Omezená záruka HP žádným způsobem
neomezuje ani neovlivňuje zákonná práva zákazníka. Další informace získáte kliknutím na následující odkaz:
Zákonná záruka spotřebitele (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) případně můžete navštívit webové stránky Evropského
spotřebitelského centra (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Spotřebitelé mají právo se rozhodnout, zda chtějí službu reklamovat v rámci omezené záruky
HP nebo v rámci zákonem stanovené dvouleté záruky u prodejce.
Slovakia
Obmedzená záruka HP je obchodná záruka, ktorú spoločnosť HP poskytuje dobrovoľne. Meno a adresa subjektu
HP, ktorý zabezpečuje plnenie vyplývajúce z Obmedzenej záruky HP vo vašej krajine:
Slovenská republika: HP Inc Slovakia, s.r.o., Galvaniho 7, 821 04 Bratislava
Výhody Obmedzenej záruky HP sa uplatnia vedľa prípadných zákazníkových zákonných nárokov voči
predávajúcemu z vád, ktoré spočívajú v nesúlade vlastností tovaru s jeho popisom podľa predmetnej
zmluvy. Možnosť uplatnenia takých prípadných nárokov však môže závisieť od rôznych faktorov.
Služby Obmedzenej záruky HP žiadnym spôsobom neobmedzujú ani neovplyvňujú zákonné práva
zákazníka, ktorý je spotrebiteľom. Ďalšie informácie nájdete na nasledujúcom prepojení: Zákonná
záruka spotrebiteľa (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), prípadne môžete navštíviť webovú lokalitu európskych
zákazníckych stredísk (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Spotrebitelia majú právo zvoliť si, či chcú uplatniť servis v rámci Obmedzenej záruky HP
alebo počas zákonnej dvojročnej záručnej lehoty u predajcu.
Poland
Ograniczona gwarancja HP to komercyjna gwarancja udzielona dobrowolnie przez HP. Nazwa i adres podmiotu
HP odpowiedzialnego za realizację Ograniczonej gwarancji HP w Polsce:
Polska: HP Inc Polska sp. z o.o., Szturmowa 2a, 02-678 Warszawa, wpisana do rejestru przedsiębiorców
prowadzonego przez Sąd Rejonowy dla m.st. Warszawy w Warszawie, XIII Wydział Gospodarczy Krajowego
Rejestru Sądowego, pod numerem KRS 0000546115, NIP 5213690563, REGON 360916326, GIOŚ
E0020757WZBW, kapitał zakładowy 480.000 PLN.
Świadczenia wynikające z Ograniczonej gwarancji HP stanowią dodatek do praw przysługujących
nabywcy w związku z dwuletnią odpowiedzialnością sprzedawcy z tytułu niezgodności towaru
z umową (rękojmia). Niemniej, na możliwość korzystania z tych praw mają wpływ różne
czynniki. Ograniczona gwarancja HP w żaden sposób nie ogranicza praw konsumenta ani
na nie nie wpływa. Więcej informacji można znaleźć pod następującym łączem: Gwarancja
prawna konsumenta (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), można także odwiedzić stronę internetową
Europejskiego Centrum Konsumenckiego (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Konsumenci mają prawo wyboru co do możliwosci skorzystania albo
z usług gwarancyjnych przysługujących w ramach Ograniczonej gwarancji HP albo z uprawnień wynikających
z dwuletniej rękojmi w stosunku do sprzedawcy.
Czech Republic
211
Bulgaria
Ограничената гаранция на HP представлява търговска гаранция, доброволно предоставяна от HP. Името
и адресът на дружеството на HP за вашата страна, отговорно за предоставянето на гаранционната
поддръжка в рамките на Ограничената гаранция на HP, са както следва:
HP Inc Bulgaria EOOD (Ейч Пи Инк България ЕООД), гр. София 1766, район р-н Младост, бул. Околовръстен
Път No 258, Бизнес Център Камбаните
Предимствата на Ограничената гаранция на HP се прилагат в допълнение към всички законови
права за двугодишна гаранция от продавача при несъответствие на стоката с договора за
продажба. Въпреки това, различни фактори могат да окажат влияние върху условията за
получаване на тези права. Законовите права на потребителите не са ограничени или засегнати
по никакъв начин от Ограничената гаранция на HP. За допълнителна информация, моля вижте
Правната гаранция на потребителя (
www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) или посетете уебсайта на Европейския
потребителски център (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Потребителите имат правото да избират дали да претендират за извършване на
услуга в рамките на Ограничената гаранция на HP или да потърсят такава от търговеца в рамките на
двугодишната правна гаранция.
Romania
Garanția limitată HP este o garanție comercială furnizată în mod voluntar de către HP. Numele și adresa entității
HP răspunzătoare de punerea în aplicare a Garanției limitate HP în țara dumneavoastră sunt următoarele:
Romănia: HP Inc Romania SRL, 5 Fabrica de Glucoza Str., Building F, Ground Floor and Floor 8, 2nd District,
Bucureşti
Beneciile Garanției limitate HP se aplică suplimentar faţă de orice drepturi privind garanţia de doi ani oferită
de vânzător pentru neconformitatea bunurilor cu contractul de vânzare; cu toate acestea, diverşi factori pot
avea impact asupra eligibilităţii dvs. de a benecia de aceste drepturi. Drepturile legale ale consumatorului
nu sunt limitate sau afectate în vreun fel de Garanția limitată HP. Pentru informaţii suplimentare consultaţi
următorul link: garanția acordată consumatorului prin lege (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) sau puteți accesa
site-ul Centrul European al Consumatorilor (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Consumatorii au dreptul să aleagă dacă să pretindă despăgubiri în cadrul
Garanței limitate HP sau de la vânzător, în cadrul garanției legale de doi ani.
Belgium and the Netherlands
De Beperkte Garantie van HP is een commerciële garantie vrijwillig verstrekt door HP. De naam en het adres van
de HP-entiteit die verantwoordelijk is voor het uitvoeren van de Beperkte Garantie van HP in uw land is als volgt:
Nederland: HP Nederland B.V., Startbaan 16, 1187 XR Amstelveen
België: HP Belgium BVBA, Hermeslaan 1A, B-1831 Diegem
De voordelen van de Beperkte Garantie van HP vormen een aanvulling op de wettelijke garantie
voor consumenten gedurende twee jaren na de levering te verlenen door de verkoper bij een
gebrek aan conformiteit van de goederen met de relevante verkoopsovereenkomst. Niettemin kunnen
diverse factoren een impact hebben op uw eventuele aanspraak op deze wettelijke rechten.
De wettelijke rechten van de consument worden op geen enkele wijze beperkt of beïnvloed
door de Beperkte Garantie van HP. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de volgende webpagina:
Wettelijke garantie van de consument (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) of u kan de website van het
Europees Consumenten Centrum bezoeken (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Consumenten hebben het recht om te kiezen tussen enerzijds de
Beperkte Garantie van HP of anderzijds het aanspreken van de verkoper in toepassing van de wettelijke garantie.
212
Appendix A Service and support
Finland
HP:n rajoitettu takuu on HP:n vapaaehtoisesti antama kaupallinen takuu. HP:n myöntämästä takuusta
maassanne vastaavan HP:n edustajan yhteystiedot ovat:
Suomi: HP Finland Oy, Piispankalliontie, FIN - 02200 Espoo
HP:n takuun edut ovat voimassa mahdollisten kuluttajansuojalakiin perustuvien
oikeuksien lisäksi sen varalta, että tuote ei vastaa myyntisopimusta. Saat
lisätietoja seuraavasta linkistä: Kuluttajansuoja (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) tai voit käydä
Euroopan kuluttajakeskuksen sivustolla (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Kuluttajilla on oikeus vaatia virheen korjausta HP:n takuun ja
kuluttajansuojan perusteella HP:lta tai myyjältä.
Slovenia
Omejena garancija HP je prostovoljna trgovska garancija, ki jo zagotavlja podjetje HP. Ime in naslov poslovne
enote HP, ki je odgovorna za omejeno garancijo HP v vaši državi, sta naslednja:
Slovenija: Hewlett-Packard Europe B.V., Amsterdam, Meyrin Branch, Route du Nant-d'Avril 150, 1217 Meyrin,
Switzerland
Ugodnosti omejene garancije HP veljajo poleg zakonskih pravic, ki ob sklenitvi kupoprodajne pogodbe
izhajajo iz dveletne garancije prodajalca v primeru neskladnosti blaga, vendar lahko na izpolnjevanje
pogojev za uveljavitev pravic vplivajo različni dejavniki. Omejena garancija HP nikakor ne omejuje
strankinih z zakonom predpisanih pravic in ne vpliva nanje. Za dodatne informacije glejte naslednjo
povezavo: Strankino pravno jamstvo (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal); ali pa obiščite spletno mesto evropskih
središč za potrošnike (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Potrošniki imajo pravico izbrati, ali bodo uveljavljali pravice do storitev v skladu z omejeno
garancijo HP ali proti prodajalcu v skladu z dvoletno zakonsko garancijo.
Croatia
HP ograničeno jamstvo komercijalno je dobrovoljno jamstvo koje pruža HP. Ime i adresa HP subjekta odgovornog
za HP ograničeno jamstvo u vašoj državi:
Hrvatska: HP Computing and Printing d.o.o. za računalne i srodne aktivnosti, Radnička cesta 41, 10000 Zagreb
Pogodnosti HP ograničenog jamstva vrijede zajedno uz sva zakonska prava na dvogodišnje jamstvo
kod bilo kojeg prodavača s obzirom na nepodudaranje robe s ugovorom o kupnji. Međutim,
razni faktori mogu utjecati na vašu mogućnost ostvarivanja tih prava. HP ograničeno jamstvo
ni na koji način ne utječe niti ne ograničava zakonska prava potrošača. Dodatne informacije
potražite na ovoj adresi: Zakonsko jamstvo za potrošače (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ili možete posjetiti
web-mjesto Europskih potrošačkih centara (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non
judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm). Potrošači imaju pravo odabrati žele li ostvariti svoja potraživanja
u sklopu HP ograničenog jamstva ili pravnog jamstva prodavača u trajanju ispod dvije godine.
Latvia
HP ierobežotā garantija ir komercgarantija, kuru brīvprātīgi nodrošina HP. HP uzņēmums, kas sniedz HP
ierobežotās garantijas servisa nodrošinājumu jūsu valstī:
Latvija: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP ierobežotās garantijas priekšrocības tiek piedāvātas papildus jebkurām likumīgajām tiesībām uz pārdevēja
un/vai rażotāju nodrošinātu divu gadu garantiju gadījumā, ja preces neatbilst pirkuma līgumam, tomēr
šo tiesību saņemšanu var ietekmēt vairāki faktori. HP ierobežotā garantija nekādā veidā neierobežo un
Finland
213
neietekmē patērētāju likumīgās tiesības. Lai iegūtu plašāku informāciju, izmantojiet šo saiti: Patērētāju
likumīgā garantija (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) vai arī Eiropas Patērētāju tiesību aizsardzības centra tīmekļa
vietni (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc-net/index_en.htm).
Patērētājiem ir tiesības izvēlēties, vai pieprasīt servisa nodrošinājumu saskaņā ar HP ierobežoto garantiju, vai arī
pārdevēja sniegto divu gadu garantiju.
Lithuania
HP ribotoji garantija yra HP savanoriškai teikiama komercinė garantija. Toliau pateikiami HP bendrovių, teikiančių
HP garantiją (gamintojo garantiją) jūsų šalyje, pavadinimai ir adresai:
Lietuva: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP ribotoji garantija papildomai taikoma kartu su bet kokiomis kitomis įstatymais nustatytomis teisėmis
į pardavėjo suteikiamą dviejų metų laikotarpio garantiją dėl prekių atitikties pardavimo sutarčiai, tačiau
tai, ar jums ši teisė bus suteikiama, gali priklausyti nuo įvairių aplinkybių. HP ribotoji garantija niekaip
neapriboja ir neįtakoja įstatymais nustatytų vartotojo teisių. Daugiau informacijos rasite paspaudę šią
nuorodą: Teisinė vartotojo garantija (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) arba apsilankę Europos vartotojų centro
internetinėje svetainėje (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Vartotojai turi teisę prašyti atlikti techninį aptarnavimą pagal HP ribotąją garantiją arba
pardavėjo teikiamą dviejų metų įstatymais nustatytą garantiją.
Estonia
HP piiratud garantii on HP poolt vabatahtlikult pakutav kaubanduslik garantii. HP piiratud garantii eest vastutab
HP üksus aadressil:
Eesti: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP piiratud garantii rakendub lisaks seaduses ettenähtud müüjapoolsele kaheaastasele garantiile, juhul
kui toode ei vasta müügilepingu tingimustele. Siiski võib esineda asjaolusid, mille puhul teie jaoks need
õigused ei pruugi kehtida. HP piiratud garantii ei piira ega mõjuta mingil moel tarbija seadusjärgseid õigusi.
Lisateavet leiate järgmiselt lingilt: tarbija õiguslik garantii (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) või võite külastada Euroopa
tarbijakeskuste veebisaiti (http://ec.europa.eu/consumers/solving_consumer_disputes/non-judicial_redress/ecc
net/index_en.htm). Tarbijal on õigus valida, kas ta soovib kasutada HP piiratud garantiid või seadusega ette
nähtud müüjapoolset kaheaastast garantiid.
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been relled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered
with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the
published environmental specications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the
problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that
prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY
OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER
BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
214
Appendix A Service and support
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO
THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Long life consumable and maintenance kit limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the earlier of a)
the printer providing a low-life indicator on the control panel, or b) the expiration of the warranty period.
Replacement Preventative Maintenance kits or LLCs products carry a 90 day parts only limited warranty, from the
last purchase date.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in
any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published
environmental specications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the
problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be
defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR
CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER
BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO
THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT TO YOU.
HP policy on non-HP supplies
HP cannot recommend the use of non-HP toner cartridges, either new or remanufactured.
NOTE: For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a relled toner cartridge does not aect
either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer. However, if product failure
or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or relled toner cartridge, HP will charge its
standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage.
HP anticounterfeit Web site
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP cartridge and the control-panel message indicates
the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your cartridge might not be a genuine HP cartridge if you notice the following:
● The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
● You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge.
● The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging diers from HP packaging).
Long life consumable and maintenance kit limited warranty statement
215
Data stored on the toner cartridge
The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the
product.
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might
include the following: the date when the toner cartridge was rst installed, the date when the toner cartridge was
last used, the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used,
any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future
products to meet our customers' printing needs.
The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to
identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product.
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling
program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied
in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this toner cartridge might have access
to this data, as well.
Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory
chip.
End User License Agreement
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE EQUIPMENT: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a
legal agreement between (a) you (either an individual or a single entity) and (b) HP Inc. ("HP") that governs your
use of the Sign-In Once application installed on or made available by HP for use with your printing device (the
“Software”).
An amendment or addendum to this EULA may accompany the HP Product.
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE,
YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS,
YOUR SOLE REMEDY IS TO IMMEDIATELY STOP USING SOFTWARE AND TO UNINSTALL THE PRODUCT FROM YOUR
DEVICE.
THIS EULA IS A GLOBAL AGREEMENT AND IS NOT SPECIFIC TO ANY PARTICULAR COUNTRY, STATE OR TERRITORY.
IF YOU ACQUIRED THE SOFTWARE AS A CONSUMER WITHIN THE MEANING OF RELEVANT CONSUMER LEGISLATION
IN YOUR COUNTRY, STATE OR TERRITORY, THEN DESPITE ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY IN THIS EULA, NOTHING IN
THIS EULA AFFECTS ANY NON EXCLUDABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OR REMEDIES THAT YOU MAY HAVE UNDER SUCH
CONSUMER LEGISLATION AND THIS EULA IS SUBJECT TO THOSE RIGHTS AND REMEDIES. REFER TO SECTION 17
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON YOUR CONSUMER RIGHTS.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. HP grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of
this EULA. In the case you are representing an entity or organization, the same terms and conditions in this
Section 1 shall also apply with respect to the use, copying, and storage of the Software on the devices of
your respective entity or organization.
a. Use. You may use one copy of the Software on your device for the purpose of accessing and using the
Software. You may not separate component parts of the Software for use on more than one device. You
do not have the right to distribute the Software, nor do you have the right to modify the Software or
disable any licensing or control feature of the Software. You may load the Software into the temporary
memory (RAM)of your device for purposes of using the Software.
b. Storage. You may copy the Software into the local memory or storage device of your device.
216
Appendix A Service and support
c. Copying. You may make archival or back-up copies of the Software, provided the copy contains all of the
original Software's proprietary notices and that it is used only for back-up purposes.
d. Reservation of Rights. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
e. Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this EULA, all or any portion of the Software
which constitutes non-proprietary HP software or software provided under public license by third
parties ("Freeware"), is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license
agreement or other documentation accompanying such Freeware at the time of download, installation,
or use of the Freeware. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and
conditions of such license.
2. UPGRADES. To use Software identied as an upgrade, you must rst be licensed for the original Software
identied by HP as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original Software
Product that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
3. ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This EULA applies to updates or supplements to the original Software provided by
HP unless HP provides other terms along with the update or supplement. In case of a conict between such
terms, the other terms will prevail.
4. TRANSFER.
a. Third Party. The initial user of the Software may make a one-time transfer of the Software to another
end user. Any transfer must include all component parts, media, printed materials, this EULA, and
if applicable, the Certicate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred product must agree to all the
EULA terms. Upon transfer of the Software, your license is automatically terminated.
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software or use the Software for commercial
timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or Software except as
expressly provided in this EULA.
5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and user documentation are owned by
HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including but not limited to United States copyright, trade secret,
and trademark law, as well as other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. You shall not remove
any product identication, copyright notices or proprietary restrictions from the Software.
6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is mandated under applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or it is expressly provided for in this EULA.
7. TERM. This EULA is eective unless terminated or rejected. This EULA will also terminate upon conditions set
forth elsewhere in this EULA or if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this EULA.
8. ACCOUNT SET-UP.
a. You must register and establish an account on HP ID in order to use the Software. It is your responsibility
to obtain and maintain all equipment, services and software needed for access to and use of the HP ID
account, any applications linked via this Software, and your device(s), as well as paying any applicable
charges.
b. YOU ARE SOLELY AND FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF ANY
USERNAMES AND PASSWORDS COLLECTED BY THE SOFTWARE. You must notify HP immediately of
any unauthorized use of your HP ID account or any other breach of security related to this Software or
the device(s) it is installed on.
End User License Agreement
217
9. NOTICE OF DATA COLLECTION. HP may collect usernames, passwords, device IP addresses, and/or other
authentication information used by you to access HP ID and the various applications connected via this
Software. HP may use this data to optimize Software performance based on user preferences, provide
support and maintenance, and assure security and software integrity. You can read more about the data
collection in the sections titled “What Data We Collect” and “How We Use Data” in the HP Privacy Statement.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, HP AND
ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE “AS IS” AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, DUTIES, AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES: (i) OF TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT; (ii) OF MERCHANTABILITY;
(iii) OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; (iv) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL FUNCTION WITH NON-HP
SUPPLIES OR ACCESSORIES; AND (v), OF LACK OF VIRUSES ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE. Some
states/jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on the duration of implied
warranties, so the above disclaimer may not apply to you in its entirety.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Subject to local law, notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire
liability of HP and any of its suppliers under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive remedy for
all of the foregoing shall be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you separately for the
Software or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR CONFIDENTIAL OR
OTHER INFORMATION, FOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY)
ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, OR
OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software,
Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S.
Government under HP's standard commercial license.
13. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You shall comply with all laws and regulations of the United States and
other countries ("Export Laws") to assure that the Software is not (1) exported, directly or indirectly, in
violation of Export Laws, or (2) used for any purpose prohibited by Export Laws, including, without limitation,
nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
14. CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in your
state of residence and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer to enter into this contract.
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of the State of California, U.S.A.
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. Unless you have entered into a separate license agreement for the Software, this EULA
(including any addendum or amendment to this EULA which is included with the HP Product) is the entire
agreement between you and HP relating to the Software and it supersedes all prior or contemporaneous
oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other
subject matter covered by this EULA. To the extent the terms of any HP policies or programs for support
services conict with the terms of this EULA, the terms of this EULA shall control.
17. CONSUMER RIGHTS. Consumers in some countries, states or territories may have the benet of certain
statutory rights and remedies under consumer legislation in respect of which HP’s liability cannot lawfully be
excluded or limited. If you acquired the Software as a consumer within the meaning of relevant consumer
legislation in your country, state or territory, the provisions of this EULA (including the disclaimers of
warranties, limitations and exclusions of liability) must be read subject to applicable law and apply only to
the maximum extent permitted by that applicable law.
218
Appendix A Service and support
Australian Consumers: If you acquired the Software as a consumer within the meaning of the ‘Australian
Consumer Law’ under the Australian Competition and Consumer Act 2010 (Cth) then despite any other
provision of this EULA:
a. the Software comes with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law,
including that goods will be of acceptable quality and services will be supplied with due care and
skill. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other
reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the Software repaired or replaced
if it is not of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure
b. nothing in this EULA excludes, restricts or modies any right or remedy, or any guarantee, warranty or
other term or condition implied or imposed by the Australian Consumer Law which cannot be lawfully
excluded or limited; and
c. the benets provided to you by the express warranties in this EULA are in addition to other rights
and remedies available to you under the Australian Consumer Law. Your rights under the Australian
Consumer Law prevail to the extent that they are inconsistent with any limitations contained in the
express warranty.
The Software may be capable of retaining user-generated data. HP hereby provides you with notice that
if HP repairs your Software, that repair may result in the loss of that data. To the full extent permitted by
law, the limitations and exclusions of HP’s liability in this EULA apply in respect of any such loss of data.
If you think that you are entitled to any warranty under this agreement or any of the above remedies,
please contact HP:
Table A-1
HP PPS Australia Pty Ltd
Building F, 1 Homebush Bay
Drive
Rhodes, NSW 2138
Australia
To initiate a support request or warranty claim, please call 13 10 47 (within Australia) or +61 2 8278 1039
(if dialing internationally) or visit www.hp.com.au and select the “Support” tab for the most current customer
service options.
If you are a consumer within the meaning of the Australia Consumer Law and you are purchasing the
Software or warranty and support services for the Software which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired for
personal, domestic or household use or consumption, then despite any other provision of this EULA, HP
limits its liability for failure to comply with a consumer guarantee as follows:
a. provision of warranty or support services for the Software: to any one or more of the following:
re-supply of the services or payment of the costs of having the services re-supplied;
b. provision of the Software: to any one or more of the following: replacement of the Software or the
supply of equivalent software; repair of the Software; payment of the costs of replacing the Software or
of acquiring equivalent software; or payment of the costs of having the Software repaired; and
c. otherwise, to the maximum extent permitted by law.
End User License Agreement
219
New Zealand Consumers: In New Zealand, the Software comes with guarantees that cannot be excluded
under the Consumer Guarantees Act 1993. In New Zealand, Consumer Transaction means a transaction
involving a person who is purchasing goods for personal, domestic or household use or consumption
and not for the purpose of a business. New Zealand consumers who are purchasing goods for personal,
domestic or household use or consumption and not for the purpose of a business ("New Zealand
Consumers") are entitled to repair, replacement or refund for a failure and compensation for other
reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. A New Zealand Consumer (as dened above) may recover the
costs of returning the product to the place of purchase if there is a breach of the New Zealand consumer law;
furthermore, if it will be of signicant cost to the New Zealand Consumer to return the goods to HP then HP
will collect such goods at its own cost. Where any supply of products or services is for business purposes,
you agree that the Consumer Guarantees Act 1993 does not apply and that given the nature and value of the
transaction, this is fair and reasonable.
© Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. All other product names mentioned herein
may be trademarks of their respective companies. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the only warranties
for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. To the extent permitted by
applicable law, HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Version: April 2019
Customer self-repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for
greater exibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identies that the
repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There
are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace
these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self
repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace
them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your
product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery.
Same-day or four-hour delivery may be oered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is
required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP species
in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases
where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a
dened period of time, normally ve (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated
documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you
for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the
courier/carrier to be used.
Customer support
Get telephone support for your country/region
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and
problem description ready.
Country/region phone numbers are on the yer that was in the box
with your product or at www.hp.com/support/.
Get 24-hour Internet support, and download software utilities and
drivers
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM480MFP
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack
Register your product www.register.hp.com
220 Appendix A Service and support
Environmental product stewardship programB
Protecting the environment
HP is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been
designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
The airborne emissions of ozone for this product has been measured according to a standardized protocol* and
when these emissions data are applied to an anticipated high-use scenario in an oice workspace**, HP has
determined there is no appreciable amount of ozone generated during printing and the levels are well within
current indoor air quality standards and guidelines.
* Test method for the determination of emissions from hardcopy devices with respect to awarding the
environmental label for oice devices with printing function; DE-UZ 205 – BAM January, 2018
** Based on ozone concentration when printing 2 hours per day in 30.6 cubic meter room with a ventilation rate
of 0.68 air changes per hour with HP printing supplies
Power consumption
Power usage drops signicantly while in Ready, Sleep, or O mode, which saves natural resources and saves
money without aecting the high performance of this product. HP printing and imaging equipment marked with
the ENERGY STAR
®
logo is qualied to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specications for
imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualied imaging products:
Additional ENERGY STAR qualied imaging product model information is listed at:
www.hp.com/go/energystar
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. HP does not recommend the
full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts
in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print
cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s duplex feature (manual or automatic) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page)
capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Environmental product stewardship program
221
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify
plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet print supplies
Original HP Supplies were designed with the environment in mind. HP makes it easy to conserve resources and
paper when printing. And when you are done, we make it easy and free to recycle.
1
All HP cartridges returned to HP Planet Partners go through a multiphase recycling process where materials are
separated and rened for use as raw material in new Original HP cartridges and everyday products. No Original
HP cartridges returned through HP Planet Partners are ever sent to a landll, and HP never rells or resells
Original HP cartridges.
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, visit www.hp.com/recycle. Select your
country/region for information on how to return HP printing supplies. Multi-lingual program information and
instructions are also included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge package.
1
Program availability varies. For more information, visit www.hp.com/recycle.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled paper and lightweight paper (EcoFFICIENT™) when the paper meets
the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of
recycled paper and lightweight paper (EcoFFICIENT™) according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
Battery information
This product may contain a:
● Poly-carbonmonouoride lithium (BR type) or
● Manganese dioxide lithium (CR type)
battery that may require special handling at end-of-life.
NOTE: NOTE for CR type only: Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See
http://dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Weight: ~3 g
Location: On motherboard
User Removable: No
222
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
廢電池請回收
For recycling information, you can contact http://www.hp.com/recycle or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: http://www.eiae.org.
Disposal of waste equipment by users (EU, UK, and India)
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect
human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for
the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household
waste disposal service, or go to: www.hp.com/recycle.
Electronic hardware recycling
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware. For more information about recycling programs
go to: www.hp.com/recycle.
Brazil hardware recycling information
Este produto eletrônico e seus componentes não devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam
em conformidade com padrões mundiais de restrição a substâncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em
quantidades mínimas, substâncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao nal da vida útil deste produto, o usuário
deverá entregá-lo à HP. A não observância dessa orientação sujeitará o infrator às sanções previstas em lei.
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou
rede de assistência técnica autorizada pela HP.
Para maiores informações, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse:
www.hp.com.br/reciclar
Chemical substances
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our
products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of
Disposal of waste equipment by users (EU, UK, and India)
223
the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at:
www.hp.com/go/reach.
Product Power Data per European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 and the UK
Relevant Statutory Requirements
For product power data, including the power consumption of the product in networked standby
if all wired network ports are connected and all wireless network ports are activated,
please refer to section P14 ‘Additional Information’ of the product IT ECO Declaration at
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html.
SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China)
中国环境标识认证产品用户说明
噪声大于 63.0 dB(A)的办公设备不宜放置于办公室内，请在独立的隔离区域使用。
如需长时间使用本产品或打印大量文件，请确保在通风良好的房间内使用。
如您需要确认本产品处于零能耗状态，请按下电源关闭按钮，并将插头从电源插座断开。
您可以使用再生纸，以减少资源耗费。
The regulation of the implementation on China energy label for printer, fax, and copier
依据
“复印机、打印机和传真机能源效率标识实施规则”，本打印机具有中国能效标签。根据“复印机、打印
机和传真机能效限定值及 能效等级” (“GB21521”) 决定并计算得出该标签上所示的能效等级和 TEC (典型
能耗) 值。
1. 能效等级
能效等级分为三个等级，等级 1 级能效最高。 根据产品类型和打印速度标准决定能效限定值。
2. 能效信息
2.1 LaserJet 打印机和高性能喷墨打印机
● 典型能耗
典型能耗是正常运行 GB21521 测试方法中指定的时间后的耗电量。 此数据表示为每周千瓦时 (kWh)。
标签上所示的能效数字按涵盖根据“复印机、打印机和传真机能源效率标识实施规则”选择的登记装置中
所有配置的代表性配置测定而 得。因此，本特定产品型号的实际能耗可能与标签上所示的数据不同。
有关规格的详细信息，请参阅 GB21521 标准的当前版本。
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India)
This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous
substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium,
polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01
weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule.
WEEE (Turkey)
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
224
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
Substances Table (China)
CHR-LJ-PK-MFP-02
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be
obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds.
EPEAT
Many HP products are designed to meet EPEAT. EPEAT is a comprehensive environmental
rating that helps identify greener electronics equipment. For more information on EPEAT
go to www.epeat.net. For information on HP's EPEAT registered products go to
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/pdf/epeat_printers.pdf.
Substances Table (China)
225
Substances Table (Taiwan)
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
● Product environmental prole sheet for this and many related HP products
● HP’s commitment to the environment
● HP’s environmental management system
● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
● Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment.
Also, visit www.hp.com/recycle.
226
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
Regulatory informationC
Regulatory statements
Regulatory model identication numbers
For regulatory identication purposes, your product is assigned a regulatory model number. Regulatory model
numbers should not be confused with marketing names or product numbers.
Product model number Regulatory model number
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480 BOISB-1901-01
European Union & United Kingdom Regulatory Notice
Products bearing the CE marking and UKCA marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives
and/or equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable: Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU, EMC
Directive 2014/30/EU, Eco Design Directive 2009/125/EC, RED 2014/53/EU, RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonized Standards. The full EU and
UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: www.hp.com/go/certicates (Search with the
product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.)
The point of contact for regulatory matters is: Email t[email protected]om
The EU point of contact for regulatory matters is:
HP Deutschland GmbH, HP HQ-TRE, 71025 Boeblingen, Germany
The UK point of contact for regulatory matters is:
HP Inc UK Ltd, Regulatory Enquiries, Earley West, 300 Thames Valley Park Drive, Reading, RG6 1PT
The product meets the requirements of EN 55032 and its equivalent UK/BS EN standard, in which case the
following applies: 'Warning – This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.’
Regulatory information
227
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
NOTE: Any changes or modications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
Canada - Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Statement
CAN ICES-3(A)/NMB-3(A)
VCCI statement (Japan)
VCCI 32-1 規定適合の場合
EMC statement (Korea)
₤ݠݠỵᑤῙ⾈ἀᩌῙ⺐
Ꮩℱᆌℱ⺙ᩡ⳹ኬᕋ⁰ݠݠᆌᩌ
ⅅῙ⾈ἀᩌῙ⺈ῠℴⰼԴᩝ₈
ῠᅔ₸ᯥ௸ఔ
$ܹݠݠ
ỵᑤῙᕙ⫥ᰐݠ⃀
EMC statement (China)
Power cord instructions
Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product
label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.
Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product.
228
Appendix C Regulatory information
Power cord statement (Japan)
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory
for products marketed in the United States. The device is certied as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely conned
within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user
operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specied in this
user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
For other US/Canada regulatory matters, please contact:
HP Inc.
1501 Page Mill Rd, Palo Alto, CA 94304, USA
Email contact: techregshel[email protected] or Telephone contact: +1 (650) 857-1501
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen
turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2014) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan
1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specicerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig
laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M480 - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita.
Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei
katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän
tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa.
Älä katso säteeseen.
Power cord statement (Japan)
229
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning.
Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan
3B laser.
Nordic Statements (Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden)
Denmark:
Apparatets stikprop skal tilsuttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord.
Finland:
Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan.
Norway:
Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.
Sweden:
Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag.
GS statement (Germany)
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen.
Um störende Reexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren
Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B. direkte
Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der Lesbarkeit der
dargestellten Zeichen kommen.
Die Bilddarstellung dieses Gerätes ist nicht für verlängerte Bildschirmtätigkeiten geeignet.
230 Appendix C Regulatory information
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia)
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia) 231
EMI statement (Taiwan)
Product stability
Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.
Do not use paper tray as a step.
Keep hands out of paper tray when closing.
All trays must be closed when moving the printer.
Telecom (fax) statements
Fax Cord Statement
Product may or may not have fax/telephone cord enclosed. If not provided to reduce the risk of re, use only No.
26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
EU and UK Statement for Telecom Operation
The printer meets applicable EU Directives & UK Statutory Instruments and carries the CE & UKCA mark
accordingly. For details see EU & UK Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer.
For printers with the feature to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks (PSTN):
Due to dierences between individual European national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional
assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on the
correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please follow the
instructions provided in the user manual. If you experience network compatibility issues, please contact your
equipment supplier or HP Inc. help desk in the country of operation. Connecting to a PSTN termination point may
be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator.
Brazil (Portugueses)
Para maiores informações consulte o site da ANATEL – www.anatel.gov.br
New Zealand Telecom Statements
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the
item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product
by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work
correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it
imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.
232
Appendix C Regulatory information
This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for New
Zealand.
Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the
back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identier in the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but
not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed ve (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that
may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for the calling area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
FCC-compliant telephone cord, jack and modular plug should be used with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is
Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to
Party Line Service is subject to state taris.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to le a complaint with the FCC
if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
aect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make the necessary modications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in this manual for repair and (or) warranty
information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you
remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
The customer can do the following repairs: Replace any original equipment that came with the device. This
includes the toner cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is
recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected.
This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains, in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the rst page of the transmission, the date and time it
is sent and an identication of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone
number of the sending machine or such business, or other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided
cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission
charges).
Industry Canada CS-03 requirements
Notice: The Industry Canada label identies certied equipment. This certication means the equipment meets
certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the
appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)
233
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware
that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs
to certied equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or
alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection
that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of
this device is shown on the regulatory chassis label.
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a
telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to
the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed ve (5).
The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the
telephone network is CA11A.
Remarque: L'étiquette Industrie Canaca identie un équiement certié. Cette certication signie que
l'équipement satisfait à certaines exigences en matière de protection, d'exploitation et de sécurité du réseau
de télécommunications, conformément au(x) document(s) sur les exigences techniques relatives à l'équipement
terminal. Le Ministère ne garantit pas que l'équipement donnera satisfaction à l'utilisateur. Avant d'installer cet
équipement, les utilisateurs doivent s'assurer qu'ils sont autorisés à connecter l'équipement aux installations
de l'entreprise locale de télécommunications. L'équipement doit également être installé via une méthode
de connexion appropriée. Le client doit être conscient que le respect des conditions ci-dessus ne peut pas
empêcher la dégradation du service dans certaines situations. Les réparations de l'équipement certié doivent
être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par le fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modication apportée
par l'utilisateur à cet équipement ou tout dysfonctionnement de l'équipement peut amener l'entreprise de
télécommunications à demander à l'utilisateur de débrancher l'équipement. Pour leur propre protection, les
utilisateurs doivent s'assurer que les connexions électriques à la terre du service public d'électricité, des lignes
téléphoniques et, le cas échéant, des conduites d'eau métalliques internes sont raccordées ensemble. Cette
précaution peut être particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales.
CAUTION: Les utilisateurs ne doivent pas tenter d'eectuer eux-mêmes de tels raccordements, mais doivent
prendre contact avec les services d'inspection électrique appropriés ou avec un électricien, selon le cas. Le
numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie (REN) de cet appareil est indiqué sur l'étiquette réglementaire du châssis.
Ce produit est conforme aux spécications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement
économique Canada.
Le numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie (REN) indique le nombre maximum d'appareils pouvant être connectés à
une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en n'importe quelle combinaison de
dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme des REN de tous les dispositifs ne dépasse pas cinq (5).
Le code de raccordement standard (type prise téléphonique) pour les appareils directement raccordés au réseau
téléphonique est CA11A.
Japan Telecom Mark
この製品には、認定済みファックス モジュールが含まれています。
234
Appendix C Regulatory information
認証番号 (XXX XXXXXXXX) は、HP アナログ ファックス アクセサリにあります。
Belarus
В соответствии с Постановлением Совета Министров Республики Беларусь от 24 мая 2017 года № 383 (об
описании и порядке применения знака соответствия к техническому регламенту Республики Беларусь)
продукция, требующая подтверждения соответствия техническому регламенту Республики Беларусь,
размещенная на рынке Республики Беларусь, должна быть маркирована знаком соответствия ТР BY.
Belarus 235
236 Appendix C Regulatory information
Index
Symbols/Numerics
550-sheet paper trays
part numbers.................................31
550-sheet tray
jams.............................................. 149
A
accessories
ordering..........................................31
part numbers.................................31
acoustic specications....................... 13
AirPrint...........................................54, 56
alternative letterhead mode15, 22, 26
Android devices
printing from...........................54, 56
anticounterfeit supplies......... 205, 215
B
batteries included................... 221, 222
bin, output
locating............................................. 3
Bonjour
identifying....................................121
browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server........121
C
calibrate
colors............................................176
scanner........................................ 184
cartridge
replacing.........................................38
cartridge policy................................... 34
cartridge protection.....................34, 36
cartridges
non-HP................................205, 215
order numbers.............................. 38
recycling..............................221, 222
warranty............................. 205, 214
checklist
wireless connectivity..................197
cleaning
glass...........................184, 188, 192
paper path................................... 172
colors
calibrate....................................... 176
control panel
help...............................................139
locating............................................. 3
locating features on the
touchscreen control panel....... 4
copy
optimize for text or pictures..... 184
copy settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 125
copying
overview.........................................61
counterfeit supplies................205, 215
customer support
online...................................205, 220
D
default gateway, setting..................131
deleting
stored jobs...............................51, 53
digital send settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 125
digital sending
folders.......................................... 104
printer memory.......................... 102
sending documents................... 100
USB............................................... 109
dimensions, printer............................ 10
disposal, end-of-life............... 221, 222
document feeder
jams.....................................149, 150
paper-feeding problems.. 142, 148
double-sided printing
Mac..................................................48
Windows.........................................45
duplex printing
Mac..................................................48
duplex printing (double-sided)
settings (Windows).......................45
Windows.........................................45
duplexer
clear jams.....................................169
jams.............................................. 149
duplexing
manually (Mac).............................. 48
manually (Windows).....................45
E
easy-access USB printing..................56
edge-to-edge copying.....................184
electronic hardware recycling....... 221,
223
Embedded Web Server
changing network settings....... 131
changing printer name.............. 131
opening........................................ 131
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
assigning passwords..................134
features........................................121
network connection................... 121
end-of-life disposal................ 221, 222
energy use, optimizing....................135
envelopes
loading............................................26
orientation..................................... 26
environmental stewardship program..
.......................................................221
Ethernet (RJ-45) port
locating............................................. 3
Eurasian conformity............... 227, 231
Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server........121
F
fax
block............................................. 119
feeding problems.............. 200, 202
Index 237
optimize for text or pictures..... 192
overview.......................................113
required settings........................ 113
settings............................... 114, 119
setup.............................................113
fax port
locating............................................. 3
fax settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 127
required........................................113
FCC regulations........................227, 228
feeding problems....................200, 202
Finnish laser safety statement..... 227,
229
folders
sending to....................................104
fraud Web site..........................205, 215
fuser
jams............................149, 165, 167
G
gateway, setting default..................131
general conguration
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 124
genuine HP cartridges........................34
glass, cleaning................ 184, 188, 192
H
hard disks
encrypted............................134, 135
hardware recycling, Brazil......221, 223
Help button
locating............................................. 4
help, control panel........................... 139
HP Customer Care...................205, 220
HP Embedded Web Server
copy settings.............121, 122, 125
digital send settings 121, 122, 125
fax settings............... 121, 122, 127
network settings...... 121, 122, 129
print settings.............121, 122, 125
scan settings.............121, 122, 125
security settings.......121, 122, 128
supplies........................................127
HP Embedded Web Server
changing network settings....... 131
changing printer name.............. 131
general conguration...... 121, 122,
124
HP Web Services.......121, 122, 129
information pages.............121-123
opening........................................ 131
other links list........... 121, 122, 125
troubleshooting tools......121, 122,
127
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
features........................................121
network connection................... 121
HP ePrint.............................................. 54
HP ePrint software............................. 54
HP fraud Web site................... 205, 215
HP JetAdvantage business solutions...
.......................................................111
HP Web Jetadmin............................. 137
HP Web Services
enabling.....................121, 122, 129
I
image quality
check toner-cartridge status...172,
173
Information button
locating............................................. 4
information pages
HP Embedded Web Server...............
........................................121-123
interface ports
locating............................................. 3
Internet Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server........121
IP Security.................................134, 135
IPsec..........................................134, 135
IPv4 address......................................131
IPv6 address......................................131
J
jams
550-sheet tray............................149
auto-navigation.......................... 150
causes of......................................150
document feeder...............149, 150
duplexer..............................149, 169
fuser........................... 149, 165, 167
locations.......................................149
output bin...........................149, 171
rear door...................................... 162
Tray 1.................................. 149, 154
Tray 2.................................. 149, 156
Tray 3........................................... 159
Japanese VCCI statement...... 227, 228
Jetadmin, HP Web............................ 137
JetAdvantage.................................... 111
jobs, stored
creating (Windows).......................51
deleting....................................51, 53
Mac settings...................................51
printing.....................................51, 53
K
Korean EMC statement...........227, 228
L
label
orientation..................................... 27
labels
printing (Windows)........................45
printing on......................................27
labels, loading..................................... 27
LAN port
locating............................................. 3
laser safety statements.........227, 229
license, software..................... 205, 216
loading
paper in Tray 1.............................. 15
paper in Tray 2.............................. 18
paper in Tray 3.............................. 22
local area network (LAN)
locating............................................. 3
lock
formatter............................ 134, 135
M
Mac driver settings
Job Storage....................................51
managing network...........................131
managing the printer
overview.......................................121
manual duplex
Mac..................................................48
Windows.........................................45
margins, small
copying.........................................184
material restrictions................221, 222
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).......
..............................................221, 225
memory
included............................................ 7
memory chip (toner)
locating...........................................38
memory chip, toner cartridge
description..........................205, 216
mercury-free product.............221, 222
minimum system requirements
macOS...............................................8
Windows........................................... 8
mobile printing
Android devices...................... 54, 56
mobile printing, software supported...
......................................................... 10
238
Index
multiple pages per sheet
printing (Mac).................................48
printing (Windows)........................45
N
Near Field Communication printing.54
Netscape Navigator, versions
supported
HP Embedded Web Server........121
network
printer name, changing............. 131
settings, changing......................131
settings, viewing.........................131
network duplex settings, changing......
.......................................................131
Network Folder, scan to...................104
network link speed settings, changing
.......................................................131
network settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 129
networks
default gateway..........................131
HP Web Jetadmin....................... 137
IPv4 address................................131
IPv6 address................................131
subnet mask................................131
supported.........................................7
NFC connect and print........................54
non-HP supplies......................205, 215
O
on/o button
locating............................................. 3
online help, control panel............... 139
online support......................... 205, 220
operating systems, supported............8
optimize copy images......................184
optimize fax images........................ 192
optimize scanned images...............188
ordering
supplies and accessories.............31
other links list
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 125
output bin
clear jams........................... 149, 171
locating............................................. 3
P
pages per minute..................................7
pages per sheet
selecting (Mac)...............................48
selecting (Windows)..................... 45
paper
jams.....................................149, 150
loading Tray 1................................15
loading Tray 2................................18
loading Tray 3................................22
selecting..............................172, 175
Tray 1 orientation.................. 15, 17
Tray 2 orientation......................... 21
Tray 3 orientation......................... 24
paper jams
550-sheet tray............................149
document feeder...............149, 150
duplexer..............................149, 169
fuser........................... 149, 165, 167
locations.......................................149
output bin...........................149, 171
rear door...................................... 162
Tray 1.................................. 149, 154
Tray 2.................................. 149, 156
Tray 3........................................... 159
paper pickup problems
solving.................................142, 145
paper trays
overview.........................................15
part numbers.................................31
paper type
selecting (Windows)..................... 45
paper types
selecting (Mac)...............................48
paper, ordering....................................31
part numbers
accessories.....................................31
replacement parts........................ 33
supplies.......................................... 31
toner cartridges.............................31
ports
locating............................................. 3
potential shock hazard.........................2
power
consumption..................................12
power connection
locating............................................. 3
power switch
locating............................................. 3
power usage..................................... 135
print drivers
Linux..................................................8
macOS...............................................8
UNIX...................................................8
Windows........................................... 8
print media
loading in Tray 1............................15
print on both sides
Mac..................................................48
manually, Windows.......................45
Windows.........................................45
print settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 125
printer
overview........................................... 1
printer memory
sending to....................................102
printer memory, scan to..................102
printing
from USB storage accessories....56
overview.........................................45
stored jobs...............................51, 53
printing on both sides
settings (Windows).......................45
private printing....................................51
product number
locating............................................. 3
protect cartridges........................ 34, 36
R
rear door
jams.............................................. 162
recycling....................................221, 222
electronic hardware.......... 221, 223
replacement parts
part numbers.................................33
replacing
toner cartridges.............................38
required settings
fax.................................................113
reset factory settings...................... 139
RJ-45 port
locating............................................. 3
S
safety statements...................227, 229
Save to printer memory..................102
scan settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 125
Scan to Network Folder...................104
initial setup.................................... 81
Scan to USB Drive.............................109
enabling..........................................96
scanner
calibrate....................................... 184
glass cleaning........... 184, 188, 192
scanning
optimize for text or pictures..... 188
overview.........................................67
scanning to email
sending documents................... 100
Index
239
scanning to folder............................ 104
scanning to printer folder............... 102
scanning to printer memory...........102
scanning to USB................................109
security
encrypted hard disk.......... 134, 135
security settings
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 128
sending to email
sending documents................... 100
serial number
locating............................................. 3
settings
fax........................................114, 119
reset to factory (default) settings...
.................................................139
Sign In button
locating............................................. 4
Sign Out button
locating............................................. 4
sleep delay
setting.......................................... 135
small margins................................... 184
software
software license agreement....205,
216
special paper
printing (Windows)........................45
speed, optimizing.............................135
status, fax accessory page............. 200
storage, job
Mac settings...................................51
store print jobs.................................... 51
stored jobs
creating (Mac)................................ 51
creating (Windows).......................51
deleting....................................51, 53
printing.....................................51, 53
storing jobs
with Windows................................ 51
subnet mask..................................... 131
supplies
counterfeit..........................205, 215
HP Embedded Web Server........127
low threshold settings...............140
non-HP................................205, 215
ordering..........................................31
part numbers.................................31
recycling..............................221, 222
replacing toner cartridges........... 38
using when low...........................140
support
online...................................205, 220
supported operating systems.............8
system requirements
HP Embedded Web Server........121
T
Taiwan EMI statement............227, 232
TCP/IP
manually conguring IPv4
parameters............................131
manually conguring IPv6
parameters............................131
technical support
online...................................205, 220
toner cartridge
low threshold settings...............140
using when low...........................140
toner cartridges
components...................................38
memory chips.................... 205, 216
non-HP................................205, 215
order numbers.............................. 38
part numbers.................................31
recycling..............................221, 222
replacing.........................................38
See toner cartridges
warranty............................. 205, 214
touchscreen
locating features..............................4
transparencies
printing (Windows)........................45
Tray 1
jams.....................................149, 154
loading envelopes.........................26
paper orientation................... 15, 17
Tray 2
jams.....................................149, 156
loading............................................18
Tray 2
paper orientation..........................21
Tray 3
jams.............................................. 159
loading............................................22
paper orientation..........................24
trays
capacity.............................................7
included............................................ 7
locating............................................. 3
use alternative letterhead mode.....
.............................................22, 26
troubleshooting
check toner-cartridge status...172,
173
jams.....................................149, 150
network problems......................196
overview.......................................139
paper feed problems................. 142
wired network.............................196
wireless network........................ 197
troubleshooting tools
HP Embedded Web Server.......121,
122, 127
two-sided printing
settings (Windows).......................45
U
USB
sending to....................................109
USB 2.0 printing port
locating............................................. 3
USB port
enabling................................... 56-58
locating............................................. 3
USB storage accessories
printing from..................................56
W
warranty
customer self repair..........205, 220
license................................. 205, 216
product.........................................205
toner cartridges.................205, 214
waste disposal.........................221, 223
web browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server........121
Web sites
customer support............. 205, 220
fraud reports......................205, 215
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
........................................221, 225
websites
HP Web Jetadmin, downloading.....
.................................................137
weight, printer.....................................10
Wi-Fi Direct Print.......................... 10, 54
wireless network
troubleshooting.......................... 197
wireless network interference.......197,
200
240 Index
